Home

2015 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual

1. Front Turn Signal sessi messas e iaae ae 663 Front Fog Lamps leeeess 663 Rear Tail Stop and Turn Signal Lamps 664 Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp 665 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 667 Rear License Lamp 00000005 667 B FLUID CAPACITIES 668 E FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARIS saient EENE aie nt a aes EAA 669 Engine iu Gace aaa oes on aty adage etg id 669 Chassis 2 21 sea stage rms 671 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 1 Power Distribution Center Fuses 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 1 Power Distribution Center 2 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 4 Air Cleaner Filter 071474393 5 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator 8 Engine Coolant Reservoir ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II CAUTION Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems W
2. EQUIPPED 5 sek CR RR RR 532 E 85 General Information 532 Ethanol Fuel E 85 00040 533 Fuel Requirements llle 533 Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehides 534 OATH success ca do Y wp a b bans dad 535 Cruising Range eek et ace eve ais 535 Replacement Parts 040 535 Maintenance 0 0200s eee 535 ADDING FUEL 000 00 536 Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release 538 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 417 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 5322 W VEHICLE LOADING 539 Certification Label llle 539 TRAILER TOWING eedem 541 Common Towing Definitions 542 Trailer Hitch Classification 545 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 000000 Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal Summit Models If Equipped 547 Trailer And Tongue Weight 548 Towing Requirements sess 550 TOWING TIPS isa iem bee meds 555 lg SNOWTLOW iiscauzcuabibraex ok he nad 556 418 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN ll RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC 557 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Models Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive 557
3. Hl After Starting ss es rg pee espn tensas E ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED ll AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Key Ignition Park Interlock 426 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 426 Fuel Economy ECO Mode Eight Speed Automatic Transmission FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION Quadra Trac I Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped 438 O Quadra Trac II Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped 438 Shift Positi nS s occ RR e ERES 439 Shifting Procedures s sss s ses ills 440 Quadra Drive II System If Equipped 445 SELEC TERRAIN IF EQUIPPED 445 Description 6 6 eee 445 Driver Information Display DID Messages 447 QUADRA LIFT IF EQUIPPED 447 Descrip Hoi ia oae e EORR Rad 447 Air Suspension Modes 4 451 Driver Information Display DID Messages 452 Op ration es ees dy ale pra er eed 452 E ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS pees cv y as 454 E OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS sss 455 Quadra Lift If Equipped 459 414 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN When To Use 4WD LOW Range If Equipped woe err ERE Ee ERO d 459 Driving Through Water 460 Driving In S
4. agi e em ans 383 Voice Text Reply pscs 424 ate ead ee td 403 Climate Control Functions 389 Climate 8 4A 8 4AN lessen 404 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 390 Navigation 8A 84AN ls ssssss 405 Operating Tips tee ERE al 392 Uconnect Access 8 4A 8 4AN 406 ll Uconnect VOICE RECOGNITION Register 84A 8 4AN 000 QUICK TIPS scairke o e oe eee 395 Mobile App 84A 84AN IntodQEN LOONT kia qi pip apt cia on Voice Texting 8 4A 8 4AN 00 409 Get Started c 2 4 94 4s 9440462 bathe oa pee 396 Yelp 8 4A 84AN eee 409 Basic Voice Commands 4 397 SiriusXM Travel Link 84A 84AN AM Badio ia recat p a id Additional Information 412 Media ge E RR ERR ed 400 PHONES aea oat pela ed e Ru dtes 402 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Outlet 2 Instrument Cluster 3 Radio 4 Glove Compartment 5 Climate Controls 040174242 6 Lower Switch Bank 11 Hood Release 7 Hazard Switch 12 Fuel Door Release 8 Storage Bin SD Card AUX USB Media Hub 13 Headlight Switch 9 ESC Button 14 Dimmer Control 10 Ignition Switch UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 0403044872 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer Indicates the eng
5. Continued 426 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the engine can be turned off This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK This system also locks the transmission in PARK when ever the ignition switch is in the OFF position Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds Fuel Economy ECO Mode The Fuel Economy ECO mode can improve the vehi cle s overall fuel economy during normal driving condi
6. Recreational Towing Quadra Trac I Single Speed Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Models ss sete ere I Rm 559 Recreational Towing Quadra Trac IK9 Quadra Drive II Four Wheel Drive Models ss ke eR 560 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 419 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING When leaving the vehicle always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever transmission gear selector Continued WARNING Continued Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear 420 STARTING A
7. leen 428 Automate i32 arr OS RR EY 428 d 3 6 44 cadets 2 ate uae oon aed 671 Maintenance eee 642 SHINE an eae Ca ed ee OR x cR ie qud 424 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 26 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 246 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 22 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 22 Transporting Pets susc Rees 108 Tread Wear Indicators llle 513 710 INDEX ee Turn Signals 33 aes Pax xen xe em x Aa 291 Uconnect Customer Programmable Features 329 Operations caede e ete E vd qr bus 357 Screen Activated Features 000 24 Uconnect Settings 22 cee eee ee 25 Uconnect Settings eee 23 Customer Programmable Features 34 Passive Entry Programming 34 Uconnect8 Settings s s distan llle 46 Uconnect Voice Command 00 395 Uniform Tire Quality Grades less 689 Universal Transmitter llle 246 Unleaded Gasoline lille 527 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 58 Vanity MIFtOIS 4 44 20 piane Prev Ee Bay 133 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Vehicle Loading 5 9 m em 500 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 Vehicle Storage s edd heb eR nn 392 Viscosity Engine Oil ck hn ch RR e 608 Voice Recognition System VR 00 395 Warning Flasher Hazard
8. 200 569 Warning Roll Over iuku pr pekSY X RENS 5 Warnings and Cautions llle 8 Warranty Information cens riena cerai 686 Washers Windshield 000000000 177 Washing Vehicle llle 644 Wheel and Wheel Trim llle 646 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 0 646 Wind Buffeting 2 0 llle 45 Window Fogging llle 392 lnc EET A1 POWGE su dn cre eie oc ed CR eda em ed 41 Wind Buttetin zs uetus Edere Berta dak d 45 ee INDEX 711 Windshield Defroster 0 000 ee eee 111 Windshield Washers lille 177 Elit 22i duct ane att RES RI Id E PB 629 Windshield Wiper Blades 0 0 622 Windshield Wipers iles 177 Wiper Blade Replacement 0 622 Wipers Intermittent 0 00 e eee 178 Wipers Rain Sensitive 0 0 e eee ii 181 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should
9. 7 a 9 0 o 064 909 Xon dif yn Ww LO 749 Seven Pin Connector 1 Battery 5 Ground 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 4 Electric Brakes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 555 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing However if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE you can use the Paddle Shift switches to manually select a lower gear NOTE Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking Paddle Shift Mode When using the Paddle Shift switches select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent downshifts For example choose 5 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 4 or 3 if needed to maintain the desired speed To prevent excess heat generation avoid continuous driving at high RPM Reduce vehicle speed as neces sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow Electronic Speed Control
10. Begin resume or pause disc play Four Colored Buttons Push to access Blu ray Disc features POPUP MENU Push to bring up repeat and shuffle options the Blu ray Disc popup menu the DVD title menu or to access disc menus KEYPAD Push to navigate chapters or titles Stop Stops disc play 44 Push and hold to fast rewind through the current audio track or video chapter Q Mutes headphone audio 15 16 17 18 19 BACK Push to exit out of menus or return to source selection screen V Push to navigate menus OK Push to select the highlighted option in a menu lt Push to navigate menus A Push to navigate menus Replacing The Remote Control Batteries The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op eration To replace the batteries e Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote then slide the battery cover downward Replace the batteries making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown Replace the battery compartment cover m UU UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369 Headphones Operation The headphones receive two separate channels of audio using an infrared transmitter from the video screen If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control verify that the screen is turned on the channel is not muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on the des
11. Continued EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587 CAUTION 2 Disconnect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 3 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 4 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable from the remote positive post of the dis charged vehicle 5 Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive 4 post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system tested at your authorized dealer Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough without engine operation the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Press and hold the lock button on the shift lever Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator 588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EBENEN NOTE Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph 8 km h
12. Display Settings Setup Brightness 415 Color 415 Aspect 416 9 Default Settings Video Screen Display Settings When watching a video source Blu ray Disc or DVD Video with the disc in Play mode Aux Video etc pushing the remote control s SETUP button activates the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373 Display Settings menu These settings control the appear ance of the video on the screen The factory default settings are already set for optimum viewing so there is no need to change these settings under normal circum stances To change the settings push the remote control s naviga tion buttons A V to select an item then push the remote control s navigation buttons E lt to change the value for the currently selected item To reset all values back to the original settings select the Default Settings menu option and push the remote control s ENTER OK button Disc Features control the remote Blu ray Disc player s settings of DVD being watched in the remote player 374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mMm Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the screen closed e Set the audio to the desired source and channel e Close the video screen e To change the current audio mode push the remote control s SOURCE button This will automatically se lect the next available audio mode without using the Mode Source Se
13. If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch re ceiver cover this must be removed to access the trailer hitch receiver if equipped This hitch receiver cover is located at the bottom center of the rear fascia 1 Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of the hitch receiver cover a 1 4 turn counterclockwise NOTE Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the slot of the locking retainer if needed for added leverage Hitch Receiver Cover 1 Hitch Receiver Cover 2 Locking Retainers 2 Pull the bottom of the cover outward towards you pull downwards to disengage the tabs located at the top of the hitch receiver cover 548 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN 0570035226 Hitch Receiver Cover To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after towing repeat the procedure in reverse order NOTE Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 6076 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions Never exceed the maxi mum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch 057003767 S
14. Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual SiriusXM Setup If Equipped After pressing the SiriusXM Setup button on the touch screen the following settings will be available e Channel Skip SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen e Subscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re subscribe ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U S residents only Restore Settings After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen the followi
15. 593 Two Wheel Drive Models 595 Without The Key Fob 0 595 Four Wheel Drive Models 596 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch bank just above the climate controls A Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 569 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C sys
16. A ees Xx 022609606 Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 C m Positioning The Lap Belt 5 Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal if any slack so that it is comfort able and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 6 To release the seat belt push the red button on the buckle The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 Atabout6 to 12 inches 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to sli
17. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered un der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Four Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case is operable vehicles with a two speed transfer case may be towed in the forward direction with ALL wheels on the ground IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL N and the transmission is in PARK Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating for detailed in structions Vehicles equipped with a single speed transfer case have no NEUTRAL position and therefore must be towed with all four wheels OFF the ground EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 597 CAUTION e Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper tow ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 601 E ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 602 ll
18. e e To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in use place the front and rear crossbars approxi mately 24 in 61 cm apart Optimal noise reduction can then be achieved by adjusting the front crossbar forward or aft using increments of 1 in 2 5 cm If or any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio antenna if equipped you may experience in terruption of satellite radio reception For improved satellite radio reception avoid placing the rear cross bar over the satellite radio antenna CAUTION To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle do not carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars installed The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars not directly on the roof If it is necessary to place the load on the roof place a blanket or some other protection between the load and the roof surface To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 Ib 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Continued 284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM CAUTION Continued WARNING e Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully Cargo must be securely tied before drivi
19. e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 431 WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the transmission is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un wanted movement Continued WARNING Continued When leaving the vehicle always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock th
20. 0 0 00 eee eee 644 Cruise Control Speed Control 191 Cupholder lt i issides e 270 Customer Assistance llle 683 Data Recorder Event 0 00000 cee eee 82 Daytime Running Lights 169 Dealer Service se re miade tae au y RR uS 605 Defroster Rear Window esee 281 Defroster Windshield lesen 111 Dipsticks OIL ENEE ene Sore Dg de eoe ip ood Power Steering iced c eed dial e eios Disabled Vehicle Towing 696 INDEX EE Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 636 Door Loeks 4 4 2424 oy eg RR ea as 31 Child Protection Door Lock Rear Doors 34 Door Locks 5 use ka Exe Y Ed 34 Door Locks Automatic llle 34 Door Opener Garages csa mic ticae metinis te 246 Driver Information Display DMI E E E ENE T EEEE STES 303 Instrument Cluster Display 303 Dara E PPP 454 Off Pavement llle 455 Off Road see ihe eae Pes cee 455 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 358 E 85 Fuel eR T EET EE 532 Economy Fuel Mode 00002000 427 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 263 Electric Rear Window Defrost 281 Electric Remote Mirrors llle 131 Electronic Brake Control System 471 Brake Assist System lt s eccessi esise nines 474 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 475 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Contr
21. Forward Collision Warning FCW is not intended to avoid a collision on its own nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death Turning FCW ON Or OFF NOTE The default status of FCW is On this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you The forward collision button is located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display To turn the FCW system OFF press the forward collision button once to turn the system OFF led turns on ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 To turn the FCW system back ON press the forward collision button again to turn the system ON led turns off Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you Changing the Active Braking status to Off prevents the system from providing limited autonomous braking or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision NOTE The FCW system state is kept in memory from one key cycle to the next If the system is turned OFF it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted Changing FCW And Active Braking Status The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are programm
22. IF EQUIPPED ll iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED ki yy RGSS ES ll Uconnect REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT RSE SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Getting Started s ccr etetea krepe das Dual Video Sereem voee Blu ray Disc Player rnistis Play Video Games 0 00000 Play A DVD Blu ray Disc Using The Touchscreen Radio lille Important Notes For Dual Video Screen DYSON a o esce acia edi use cupo Meacham des Blu ray Disc Player Remote Control If Equipped esans saga ESSERE RS 357 Replacing The Remote Control Batteries 368 Headphones Operation liess 369 id Controls eee dor RR ARES RS 370 7 Replacing The Headphone Batteries 371 358 Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty 0 0000 371 ad ll STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF 361 EOUIPPED 4 iex Sarid exei dee ot eu 378 363 Radio Operation 0000006 379 CD Player 2a e Re e en 379 qus E CD DVD Blu ray Disc MAINTENANCE 380 366 ll RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES 380 Regulatory And Safety Information 381 367 M CLIMATE CONTROLS het egddamedd ES 382 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 General Overview
23. If your liftgate is power closing and you put the vehicle in gear the liftgate will continue to power close However vehicle movement may result in a detection of an obstruction WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed Do not use the recirculation mode 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Seat Belt Systems e Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Air Bags e Supplemental Active Head Restraints e Child Restraints Important Safety Precautions Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat 2 If a child from 2 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child restraint must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use th
24. You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Accessory Belt Serpentine Belt When inspecting accessory drive belts small cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib are considered normal These are not a reason to replace belt ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615 Conditions that would require replacement e e e e e e Rib chunking one or more ribs has separated from belt body Rib or belt wear Longitudinal belt cracking cracks between two ribs Belt slips Groove jumping belt does not maintain correct position on pulley Belt broken note identify and correct problem before new belt is installed Noise objectionable squeal squeak or rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools we recommend having your vehicle ser viced at an authorized dealer Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a cor
25. button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval and choose either 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec or 90 seconds Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate e Headlight Illumination On Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status press the or button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate e Headlights With Wipers If Equipped When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press the Headlights With Wipers button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347 e Auto Dim High Beams If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headligh
26. leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with CAUTION Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the controls or move the vehicle parking brake released a brake system malfunction Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an before driving failure to do so can lead to brake authorized dealer immediately failure and a collision Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 471 BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still func tion However there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness You may notice increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake System Warning Light In the event power assist is lost for any reason i e repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function However the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Electronic Roll Mitigation ER
27. shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle ram to roll even if the transmission is in PARK The 2 Press and hold the brake pedal parking brake should always be applied when the 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL driver is not in the vehicle It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL N before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing 562 STARTING AND OPERATING 4 If vehicle is equipped with Quadra Lift air suspen sion ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height 5 Using a ballpoint pen or similar object press and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL N button lo cated by the selector switch for four seconds The light behind the N symbol will blink indicating shift in progress The light will stop blinking stay on solid when the shift to NEUTRAL N is complete A FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL message will appear in the Driver Information Display DID Refer to Driver Information Display DID in Under 0582003302 standing Your Instrument Panel for further informa NEUTRAL N Switch ton 6 After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL N light stays on release the NEUTRAL N button 7 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 8 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement
28. C STARTING AND OPERATING 563 9 Shift the transmission back into NEUTRAL NOTE 10 With the transmission and transfer case in NEU e Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that must be met TRAL press and hold the ENGINE START STOP button until the engine turns off Turning the engine off will automatically place the transmission in PARK before pressing the NEUTRAL N button and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met before press ing the NEUTRAL N button or are no longer met during the shift then the NEUTRAL N indicator light 11 Press the ENGINE STOP START button again with ill flash l 1l all out pressing the brake pedal if needed to turn the DEE ati dedito dua quic a calice ignition switch to the OFF pos ition or until the NEUTRAL N button is released The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position tos SES Ppa ie pathy Viale for a shift to take place and for the position indicator 13 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the tow bar ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no 14 Release the parking brake position indicator lights will be on or flashing A flashing NEUTRAL N position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met 564 STARTING AND OPERATING e If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra Lift air 6 Using a ballpoint pe
29. During Express Close opera tion any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Opening Power Shade Express Press the shade switch rearward and release it within one half second and the shade will open automatically from any position The shade will open and stop automati cally at the half open position Press the shade switch rearward again and release it within one half second and the shade will open automatically to the full open position This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the shade switch will stop the shade Opening Power Shade Manual Mode To open the shade press and hold the switch rearward The shade will open and stop automatically at the half open position Press and hold the shade switch rearward again and the shade will open automatically to the full open position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Closing Power Shade Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the shade will close auto
30. If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads e When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed 556 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN e Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to SNOW PLOW maximize fuel efficiency Snow plows winches and other aftermarket equipment Cooling System should not be added to the front end of your vehicle The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure The airbags could deploy unexpect edly or could fail to deploy during a collision To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans aaa mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Do not add a snow plow winches or any other aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle This could adversely affect the functioning of the Reduce speed airbag system and you could be injured Highway Driving Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily m HE STARTING AND OPERATING 557 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Two Wheel Drive Four Wheel Drive Models Without Four Wheel Drive Models With 4 LO
31. NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI BAR or kPa 524 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN 1 5 MPH Tire Low Inflate to 270 kPa Press b to Hide ooooo VEHICLE INFO Tire Pressure 0550001492 Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is in a different color on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure displayed in the Inflate to XXX message NOTE When filling warm tires the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi 30 kPa above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off The system will automatically update the graphic dis play of the pressure value s will return to its original color and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 525 Service Tpm System Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The DID will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds This message is then followed b
32. This telltale will turn on to indicate that the e Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait Adaptive Cruise Control system is ready to be e Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open activated m e Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance Hill Descent o Entry Exit Watch For Clearance we This telltale will turn on to indicate that the Hill c Descent system is activated Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For jacking And Tire Change e Selec Speed ieee a ice C MM i GUN This telltale will turn on to indicate that the The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the so Selec Speed is activated white telltales area on the right amber telltales in the middle and red telltales on the left 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Adaptive Cruise Control Ready and Adaptive Cruise Control Set This telltale will turn on to indicate that the ACC is ready and has been set to the desired speed DID Amber Telltales This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include e Low Fuel Telltale When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator Se oe e s This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind shield washer fluid is low e Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale This telltale indicates that the transmission E fluid temperature is running hot This may occur with
33. e Show fuel prices e Show 5 day weather forecast e Show extended weather TIP Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com mand HI 8 F Travel Link zm Fuel Prices Siriusxm Weather Map TRAFFIC ler VAS of for v4 Radio Media Controls Climate Phone exer 0415029597 SiriusXM Travel Link 412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Additional Information 2014 Chrysler Group LLC All rights reserved Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of Chrysler Group LLC Android is a trademark of Google Inc SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc Yelp Yelp logo Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp Uconnect System Support e U S residents call DriveUconnect com Canadian residents call 1 800 465 2001 English or 1 800 387 9983 French or visit DriveUconnect ca 1 877 855 8400 or visit Mon Fri 7 00 am 12 00 am ET Sat 8 00 am 10 00 pm ET Sun 9 00 am 5 00 pm ET Uconnect Access Services Support 1 855 792 4241 Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS Bl STARTING PROCEDURES Automatic Transmission Keyless Enter N Go 00 Normal Starting ds RR eee oS Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C If Engine Fails To Start
34. larly unattended children can become entrapped Press the switch rearward and release it within one half by the power sunroof while operating the power second The sunroof and sunshade will open automati sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in cally from any position The sunroof and sunshade will serious injury or death open fully and stop automatically This is called Express In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown Open During Express Open operation any movement from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are also properly secured Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close
35. or USB device Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist album song and genre information is displayed 72 W 66 out 71 repeat shuffle 202 rear media a a Moonlight Sonata Browse by Be Now Playing P Artists O Albums X Genres v Uconnect 8 4A 8 4AN Media Uconnect 5 0 Media 402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Phone Making and answering hands free phone calls is easy with Uconnect When the Phonebook button is illumi nated on your touchscreen your system is ready Check UconnectPhone com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions Push the Phone button w After the beep say one of the following commands e Call John Smith e Dial 123 456 7890 and follow the system prompts Redial call previous outgoing phone number Call back call previous incoming phone number TIP When providing a Voice Command push the Phone button w and say Call then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book When a contact has multiple phone numbers you can say Call John Smith work 10 10 ROAM alll Nokia 9211 Cana Redial Phone Ready xd Settings 0415029430 Uconnect 5 0 Phone UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403 1 Once an incoming text message is read to you push the Phone button After the beep say Reply 2 Listen to the Uconnect prompts After the beep repeat one of the pre defined message
36. porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale WARNING If the gross trailer weight is 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg or more it is mandatory to use a weight distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle If you use a standard weight carrying hitch you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision en STARTING AND OPERATING 543 Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer The recommended tongue weight is 1076 to 1576 for a conventional hitch You must consider this as part of the load
37. standing Your Instrument Panel for further information STARTING AND OPERATING 465 NOTE Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera tional it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers e If the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service 5 7L Engine The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost 466 STARTING AND OPERATING EE If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will WARNING sd WARNING still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering Continued operation with reduced power steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others parking maneuvers Service should be obtained as soon as possible NOTE CAUTION Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end there is a problem with the power steering system of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
38. 040973365 Driver Information Display DID Location 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mMm The DID Menu items consists of the following The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel Digital Speedometer e Vehicle Info Terrain If Equipped Driver Assist If Equipped Fuel Economy e Trip gt Audio N ee e Stored Messages 2 e Screen Setup e Speed Warning If Equipped DID Buttons e Diagnostics If Equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 e LIP Arrow Button e OK Button A Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll The OK button may be used for the following upward through the main menu and Selection submenus Reset hold e DOWN Arrow Button Clearing hold Push and release the DOWN arrow button to DID Displays m V scroll downward through the main menu and The DID displays are located in the center portion of the submenus cluster and consist of multiple sections RIGHT Arrow Button 1 Main Screen The inner ring of the display will Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to illuminate in grey under normal conditions yellow for access the information screens or submenu non critical warnings red for critical warnings and screens of a main menu item white for on demand information e BACK LEFT Arrow Button 2 Audio Information and Sub menu Information Whenever there are submenus
39. 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever gear selector is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pushed once the Driver Information Display DID will dis play a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position 422 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN ENGINE START STOP Button Functions With Driver s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position The ENGINE START STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the ignition positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e Starting with the ignition in the OFF position Push the ENGINE START STOP button once to place the ignition to the ACC posi
40. Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non Flex Fuel Vehicles FFV are compatible with gaso line containing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms Operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on Poor engine performance Poor cold start and cold drivability Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion 530 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following Drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer Change the engine oil and oil filter Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline Meth
41. If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659 REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulbs Bulb Number Glove Box Lamp 194 Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976 Rear Cargo Lamp 214 2 Visor Vanity Lamp V26377 Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906 Instrument Cluster General Illumination 103 Telltale Hazard Lamp 74 660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Headlamps Low Beam If Equipped H11 Premium Headlamps Low High Beam D3S Serviced at Authorized Dealer Headlamps High Beam If Equipped 9005 Premium Park Turn Signal Lamp LED Service at Authorized Dealer Premium Daytime Running Lamp DRL LED Service at Authorized Dealer Front Fog Lamps H11 Front Side Marker If Equipped W5W Premium Front Side Marker If Equipped LED Service at Authorized Dealer Front Park Turn Lamp If Equipped 7444NA WY27 8W Rear Body Side
42. Mist Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position and release for a single wiping cycle 031563350 Windshield Washer Operation If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off position the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles then turn off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid 031563345 Mist Control Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position one is the least sensitive and wiper delay position four is the most sensitive Setting three should be used for normal rain conditions Settings one and two can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Setting four can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system
43. NOTE If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two seconds then the system will cancel and the brake force will be ramped out The driver will have to apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill e ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity WARNING The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed While ACC is set you can increase the set speed by pressing the SET button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is
44. Refer to Driver Information Display DID in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Comfort Systems If Equipped When remote start is activated Auto Comfort will work anytime the temperature conditions are correct when the feature is enabled regardless of remote start or regular keyless go start and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position The Comfort System can be activated and deactivated PINE through the Uconnect system For more information on Comfort System operation refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel DOOR LOCKS The power door locks can be manually locked from inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward To unlock the front doors pull the inside door handle to the first detent To unlock the rear doors pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward If the lock knob is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the W
45. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is the occupant s body is LESS than 6 inches locked into position Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can Seat Belt Extender increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly even when lap belt is not long enough and only use in the the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper recommended seating positions Remove and store shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest the Seat Belt Extender when not needed position your authorized dealer can provide you with a 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Pretensioner The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the perform
46. Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 433 WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE D This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the Paddle Shift switches refer to Paddle Shift Mode in this section for further information to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will i
47. before driving away vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below 22 F 30 C or temperatures above 150 F 65 C Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pushing any of the power liftgate switches If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position The power liftgate must be in the full open position for rear liftgate close button on the left rear trim near the liftgate opening to operate If the liftgate is not fully open push the Liftgate button on the Key Fob twice to fully open the liftgate and then push it twice to close If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the power liftgate is closing the liftgate will reverse to the full open position If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the power liftgate is opening the liftgate motor will dis engage to allow manual operation If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle the system will automatically stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
48. bum per stickers bicycle racks etc 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE wee J Sensor Location The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible chime alert and reducing the radio volume Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information Warning Light Location The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Entering From The Side Entering From The Rear Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side of the vehicle side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h Side Monitoring Rear Monitoring 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less than 10 mph 16 km h and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph 16 km h the warning light will not illuminate Overtaking Approaching Overtaking Passing The BSM
49. damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor You can be badly injured working on or around a P 5 y mp P motor vehicle Only do service work for which you mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance nents as the chemicals can damage your engine services determined by the engineers who designed your transmission power steering or air conditioning vehicle Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed Maintenance Schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607 Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such
50. haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep 630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M into the passenger compartment In addition have the CAUTION exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required e The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves
51. or plug and play a variety of standard video games or audio devices Please review this Owner s Manual to become familiar with its features and operation Getting Started e Screen s located in the rear of front seats Open the LCD screen cover by lifting up on cover 044874385 Rear Seat Entertainment System Screen Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position e Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu ray Disc Player If equipped with a Blu ray Disc Player the icon will be present on the Player en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359 e Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system by push e With the Dual Video Screen System Channel 1 Rear 1 ing the Power button on the remote control on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to e When the Video Screen s are open and a DVD Bht Screen 1 driver s side and Channel 2 Rear 2 on the SMELL eI f Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2 ray Disc is inserted into the Disc player the screen s turn s ON automatically the headphone transmitters passengerside turn ON and playback begins 0449013138 0449013138 Rear Seat Entertainment System Channel 1 Rear 1 Rear Seat Entertainment System Remote Control Channel Selector 360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MMM uv exo Le 0449013137 Rear Seat Entertainment System Headphone Channel Selector The system can be controlled by the front seat occu pants utilizing either the t
52. the new set speed will be established To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways However it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions Electronic Speed Control function performs differently Please refer to the proper section within this chapter ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control ACC uti
53. 0 0 569 Headlights se oo wash bU aere aan de aoe 661 Bulb Replacement 00 0000 662 Cleaning oa aos oS Rea os Ra ee d 648 On With Wipers isses ees 168 Passing sa aos tee Rae deb BOR Ae S ha 177 Replacing s c ectars 4d mic Soh Ged PES Aha hes 662 Heated Mirrors llle 132 Heater Engine Bloke sioti eseu detui Cremada 424 High Beam Indicator coe rison iang uunaa eii 290 Hill Descent Controle es sasesana eee 482 Hill Start Assis oss cee ER E ERR 479 Hitches Trailer TOWNE i13 ai again eg eb RR dg ee ads 545 HomeLink Garage Door Opener 246 Hood Release i229 eant se eet Lee eee E 165 700 INDEX ea Ignition Keys aa SOs appo eor Rc EO OR ER e b d 14 Illuminated Entry esee ib bet R ag seres 22 Immobilizer Sentry Key 06 17 Inside Rearview Mirror llle sss 123 Instrument Cluster 24a ear er er ER 290 Instrument Panel and Controls 288 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 649 Interior Appearance Care llle 647 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 178 Introduction sess eR e ERR coe behead vay 4 Inverter Power 2 eee 268 iPod Control oie euer Soe ee a Rn 357 iPod USB MP3 Control llle sss 357 Bluetooth Streaming Audio 357 Jacking Instructions l l lesse 575 Jack Location 2 22 zs e RR y en 572 Jack Op ration c2 s s dere ed Karen ere ten s 575 Jump Starting i ezasex p
54. 387 9983 French 686 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE MM WARNING Engine exhaust internal combustion engines only some of its constituents and certain vehicle compo nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of compo nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysle
55. 639 With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake linings wear However an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued WARNING Continued To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Cont
56. ANY FAILURE OR DE FECT IN THE PRODUCT NOR I UNWIRED LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL EXEMPLARY PU NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER Some states and jurisdictions 372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mMm may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction What Will Unwired Do Unwired at its option will repair or replace any defective Product Unwired re serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with a comparable model THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WAR RANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE If you have any questions or comments regarding your Unwired wireless headphones please phone 1 888 293 3332 or email customersupport unwiredtechnology com You may register your Unwired wireless headphones online at www unwiredtechnology com or by phone at 1 888 293 3332 System Information Disc Menu When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc pushing the remote control s POP UP MENU button displays a list of all commands which control playback of the disc
57. DRIVE mode You do not need to push the shift lever button when toggling between DRIVE and SPORT modes Manual shifts can be made using the shift paddles mounted on the steering STARTING AND OPERATING 429 wheel Pressing the shift paddles while in the DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select the trans mission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster Refer to Paddle Shift Mode in this section for further information Shift Lever 430 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK P This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade NOTE On four wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position WARNING
58. Examples of this message type are Turn Signal On if a turn signal is left on and Lights On if driver leaves the vehicle e Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state Examples of this message type are Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar and Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start e Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen An example of this message type is Automatic High Beams On Engine Oil Life Reset Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will display in the DID for five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily push and release the OK button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mMm Oil Chang
59. Front Radar Sensor and the system will deactivate The ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas i e tunnels with reflective tiles or ice and snow The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path EN this warning may temporarily occur NOTE If the ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor warning is active Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the sensor It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee To keep the ACC System operating properly it is impor tant to note the following maintenance items e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens Do not remove any screws from the sensor Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to a collision see your authorized dealer for service Do not attach or install any accessories near
60. Ground Models 4 LO Range Ranae Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED See Instructions e Transmission in PARK e Transfer case in NEUTRAL N e Tow in forward direction Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK OK OK 558 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN NOTE When recreationally towing your vehicle always fol low applicable state and provincial laws Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details e Vehicles equipped with Quadra Lift must be placed in Transport Mode before tying them down from the body on a trailer or flatbed truck Refer to Quadra Lift If Equipped in Starting and Operating for more information If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode for example engine will not run tie downs must be fastened to the axles not to the body Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and or cause loss of proper tie down tension Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the drivetrain will result Recreational towing for two wheel drive models is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer If using a tow dolly follow this procedure 1 Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 2 Drive the rear wheels on
61. HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e e Replace the battery in the original hand held transmit ter Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at HomeLink com for information or assistance WARNING e Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at HomeLink com for safety information or assistance mmm UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 General Information POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is loc
62. If Equipped F32 30 Amp Pink Drive Train Control Module F34 30 Amp Pink Slip Differential Control F35 30 Amp Pink Sunroof If Equipped F36 30 Amp Pink Rear Defroster F37 25 Amp Clear Rear Blower Motor If Equipped F38 30 Amp Pink Power Inverter 115V AC If Equipped F39 30 Amp Pink Power Liftgate If Equipped F40 10 Amp Red Daytime Running Lights Headlamp Leveling 654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F42 20 Amp Yellow Horn F44 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port F46 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor If Equipped F49 10 Amp Red Integrated Central Stack Climate Control F50 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module If Equipped F51 15 Amp Blue Ignition Node Module Keyless Ignition Steering Column Lock F52 i 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor F53 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Left Turn Stop Lights If Equipped F55 10 Amp Red DTV DSRC F56 15 Amp Blue Additional Content Diesel engine only F57 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps LH If Equipped F59 10 Amp Red Purging Pump Diesel engine only F60 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F61 10 Amp Red Transmission Control Module PM Sensor diesel engine only F62 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch F63 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils Gas U
63. If equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control ACC 1 With the lower fascia removed which provides access to the sensor and bracket disconnect the wiring harness from the sensor Using a suitable tool disconnect the wire clip from the bracket Using a suitable tool remove the two fasteners that hold the sensor bracket to the bumper beam NOTE It is recommended to scribe location to assist in reinstallation STARTING AND OPERATING 457 4 Locate the protective connector on the rear of the NOTE Only models with the Off Road Package are bumper beam equipped with the a protective connector 5 Remove the plug from the protective connector and install on the sensor 6 Insert the wiring harness connector into the protective connector 7 Store sensor and bracket in a safe place NOTE All cruise control functions will be disabled when ram the radar sensor is disconnected Radar sensor installation procedure If equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control ACC 1 Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the 1 Inside Bumper Beam i 2 Protective Connector Location protective connector on the bumper beam 3 Sensor Bracket Fasteners 4 Sensor Bracket 2 Remove plug from radar sensor and install in protec tive connector 458 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN 3 Using the previously scribed marks reinstall the radar 2 Working your way outward engage the tabs into the sensor and bracket u
64. Indicator Light If Equipped tw The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator ee Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 21 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped a This indicator will illuminate when the park zb Q lights or headlights are turned on DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY DID The Driver Information Display DID features a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster V
65. O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 6 Upper Left Selectable DID This area of the cluster will display selectable informa tion such as compass outside temperature etc For further information refer to Driver Information Display DID in this section 7 Turn Signal Indicator The arrows will flash with the exterior turn lt gt signals when the turn signal lever is operated A tone will chime and a DID message will appear if either turn signal is left on for more than 1 mile 1 6 km NOTE If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 8 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 9 Upper Right Selectable DID This area of the cluster will display selectable informa tion such as compass outside temperature etc For further information refer to Driver Information Display DID in this section 10 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL LS The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mMm Certain conditions poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine
66. ON Or OFF 234 cores 220 Changing FCW And Active Braking Status 221 FCW Limited Warning lessen 222 Service FCW Warning 0 000 222 E PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED i42 39 e bx heh eb rh a 223 ParkSense Sensors sess 223 ParkSense amp Warning Display 224 ParkSense Display essi morcosan tmr ast Enabling And Disabling ParkSense Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist Cleaning The ParkSense System ParkSense System Usage Precautions ll PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED ParkSense Sensors ParkSense Warning Display ParkSense Display 06 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense Service The ParkSense Park Assist System Cleaning The ParkSense System 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee ParkSense System Usage Precautions E PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED umm iv eae nate dade onal Bl OVERHEAD CONSOLE 0 Front Map Reading Lights If Equipped Courtesy Lights 00 Sunglasses Bin Door s sses sesers srst ea ll GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Programming A Rolling Code Programming A Non Rolling Code Can
67. OPERATING EBENEN Towing Requirements Tires Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact WwARNNG W spare tire ARNING e Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake Tires General Information in Starting And Oper system and cause it to fail You might not have ating for proper tire inflation procedures brakes when you need them and could have an accident Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage e Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in front of you Failure to do so could result in an in Starting And Operating for the proper inspection accident procedure e When replacing tires refer to Tires General Informa tion in Starting And Operating for the proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits en STARTING AND OPERATING 553 CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should
68. TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107 WARNING The top tether anchorages are not visible until the gap panel is folded down Do not use the visible cargo tie down hooks located on the floor behind the seats to attach a child restraint tether anchor An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap e If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat Top Tether Strap Mounting make sure the tether strap does not slip into the 6 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child opening between the seatbacks as you remove restraint manufacturer s instructions slack in the strap 022633032 108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruis
69. The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description un der Occupant Restraints Lap Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 022668725 e ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor e Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE mMm What is the weight limit child s weight 4 weight of the child restraint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Can the head restraints be removed Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Yes Yes No Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact The head restraints may b
70. The uttons On The Touchscreen Faceplate 384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL gt Uconnect 8 4 Automatic Temperature Controls Buttons On The Touchscreen Button Descriptions Applies To Both The Buttons On The Faceplate And The Buttons On The Touchscreen 1 MAX AIC Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when MAX A C is ON Performing this function again will cause the MAX A C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A C indicator will turn off 2 AIC Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON Performing this function again will cause the A C operation to switch into manual mode and the A C indicator will turn off 3 Recirculation Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 4 AUTO Operation Button Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385 5 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets When the defrost button is selected
71. To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off push and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is activated the turn signals will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH 24 km h or greater NOTE The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0 Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply Batteries could contain dangerous materials Please dispose of them according to respect for environment and local laws Used batterie
72. Turn Signal Lamps 7440NA WY21W Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps LED Service at Authorized Dealer Liftgate Backup Lamps 921 W16W Rear License Lamps LED Service at Authorized Dealer Rear Body Side Stop Lamps 3157KRD LCP ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661 Bulb Number Rear Body Side Tail Lamps LED Service at Authorized Dealer CHMSL Center High Mounted Stop Lamp LED Service at Authorized Dealer NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID If Equipped The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb 7 yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service 662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge HID headlamps when the headlamp sw
73. U L E S 8 674 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MMM MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures and E85 fuel usage will influence when the Oil Change Required message is displayed Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3 500 miles 5 600 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever comes first Severe Duty All Models e Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles 6 500 km if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip Check engine oil level Check windshield washer fluid level Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage Check the fluid levels of the coolant
74. WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION Quadra Trac I amp Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped The Quadra Trac I is a single speed HI range only transfer case which provides convenient full time four wheel drive No driver interaction is required The Brake Traction Control BTC System which combines standard ABS and Traction Control provides resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer to wheels with traction NOTE The Quadra Trac I8 system is not appropriate for conditions where 4WD LOW range is recommended Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in Starting and Oper ating for further information Quadra Trac II Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped The Quadra Trac II transfer case is fully automatic in the normal driving 4WD AUTO mode The Quadra Trac II amp transfer case provides three mode positions e 4WD HI e NEUTRAL e 4WD LOW This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD HI mode When additional traction is required the 4WD LOW position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOW position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components ee STARTING AND OPERATING 439 When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximatel
75. YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL xe Product Agreement STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF This product incorporates copyright protection technol BOUIEPEB ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec The remote sound system controls are located on the rear tual property rights Use of this copyright protection surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is access the switches intended for home or other limited viewing uses other wise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited pid Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby MLP Loss less and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Confidential unpublished works Copyright 1992 1997 Dolby Laboratories All right reserved 0450042261 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379 The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SXM CD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center The funct
76. You do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when refueling You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE Use seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel ASTM D5798 With non seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed especially when the ambient temperature is below 32 F 0 C e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 ee STAR
77. a lowered apparent volume level If you increase the volume level to account for this change in level remember to lower the volume before changing the disc or to another mode Recorded Discs The Blu ray Disc player will play CD R and CD RW discs recorded in CD Audio or Video CD format or as a CD ROM containing MP3 or WMA files The player will also play DVD Video content recorded to a DVD R or DVD RW disc DVD ROM discs either pressed or re corded are not supported If you record a disc using a personal computer there may be cases where the Blu ray Disc player may not be able to play some or the entire disc even if it is recorded in a compatible format and is playable on other players To help avoid playback problems use the following guide lines when recording discs Open sessions are ignored Only sessions that are closed are playable For multi session CDs that contain only multiple CD Audio sessions the player will renumber the tracks so each track number is unique 376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mMm For CD Data or CD ROM discs always use the ISO 9660 Level 1 or Level 2 Joliet or Romeo format Other formats such as UDF HFS or others are not supported The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99 folders per CD R and CD RW disc Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the Video TS portion of the disc If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is p
78. a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so Continued WARNING Continued great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult seat belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Carefully read and follow all the instruc tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Mmmm NOTE e For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK 732 8243 Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada s website for additional information e www tc gc ca eng roadsafety safedrivers childsa
79. and ON RUN The fourth position is START during start RUN will illuminate NOTE In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button the RKE transmitter Key Fob may have a low or dead battery In this situation a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch Put the nose side side opposite of the emergency key of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet park ing ES To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch PEN START 7 at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and O then pull the key out with your other hand ENGINE 0202001141 Keyless Ignition Node KIN Key Fob The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob 0202042091 The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead Emergency Key Removal 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Ignition Or Accessory On Message Opening the driver s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON engine not running a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignit
80. and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense e When you turn ParkSense OFF the instrument clus ter will display PARKSENSE OFF Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key e When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned OFF the DID will display PARKSENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM e e ParkSense when on will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc are placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message to be displayed in the DID e ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in the open position and the vehicle is i
81. available the position Push and release the LEFT arrow button to within the subnet Ts shown hete 1 access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item 3 Reconfigurable Telltales Information 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mMm 4 Telltales Indicators 5 Shift Lever Status PRNDL 6 Selectable Information Compass Temp Range to Empty Trip A Trip B Average Fuel Economy Current Fuel Economy 7 Air Suspension Status If Equipped 8 4WD Status Status 9 Selectable Gauge 1 The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu The main display area also displays pop up messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or infor mation messages These pop up messages fall into several categories e Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Most of the messages of this type are then stored as long as the condition that activated it remains active and can be reviewed from the Messages main menu item Ex amples of this message type are Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out and Low Tire Pressure E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 e Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared
82. by consumers The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emit ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones However the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments such as aboard airplanes If you are unsure of restrictions you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and rmm 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration Le pr sent appareil est conforme aux CNR d Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de li cence L exploitation est autoris e aux deux conditions suivantes 1 l appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil lage et 2 l utilisateur de l appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radio lectrique subi m me si le brouillage est susceptible d en compromettre le fonctionnement 382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MMM NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter ference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate
83. coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631 Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions 632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from y
84. correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even NW 99 1 5 ommno Roe if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger EN i illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure 270 and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in 270 the tire ooooo VEHICLE INFO Tire Pressure 0745001491 Tire Pressure Monitor Display NOTE It is particularly important for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components Receiver Module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Driver Information Display DID and a graphic displaying tire pressures Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light STARTING AND OPERATING 523 Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings l The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low In addition the DID will display a Tire Low message an Inflate to XXX message and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s displayed in a different color Refer to Driver Information Display DID in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information
85. could be pushed into you causing serious injury 2 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABICS Located above the side windows The trim covering the SABICS is labeled SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG 0226004403 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Label Location 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front and rear seat outboard occupants SABICs may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle rollover events in addition to the injury reduction poten tial provided by the seat belts and body structure The SABICs deploy downward covering the side win dows An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out of the way and covers the window The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events WARNING e Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supple mental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABICs Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are locate
86. cycles within approximately one minute and they will turn off approximately four minutes after the wipers completely stop Refer to Windshield Wipers And Washers in this section for further information NOTE When your headlights come on during the day time the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower nighttime intensity ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Automatic High Beam If Equipped The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera de tects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NOTE The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the Uconnect 9 System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly To opt out of the Advanced Auto High Beam Sensitiv ity Control default and enter Reduced High Beam Sensitivity Control not recommended toggle high beam lever 6 full on off cycles
87. der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle WARNING Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Continued 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of the seat belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to
88. detected when they are in instrument cluster close proximity ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in ud vehicle vul is nd when using the open position An opened liftgate could provide a Farksenseo ut onder To De able toatop mi 1086 WEE hen an obstacle is detected It is recommended false indication that an obstacl behind the vehicle wW TENE c id ende that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense e ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 WARNING WARNING Continued e Drivers must be careful when backing up even could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem when using ParkSense Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles EN obstructions and blind spots before backing up PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF You are responsible for safety and must continue to EQUIPPED pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so Your vehicle may be equipped with the Park View Rear can result in serious injury or death Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen Before using ParkSenseG it is strongly recom image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem the shift lever gear selector is put into REVERSE The bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the image will be displayed on the Navigation Multimedia vehicle is
89. dnd eid Ep i eae dread 438 Four Wheel Drive Operation llle 438 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle llle 587 Front Axle Differential 00 640 buelto tant ont bees eis Bes es en age a 527 Adding ce Bethe eee Pea we PRESS 536 AOI VES S Cures Puno MA hastens ee 530 Clean Air isole G68 Rei aed ed eps 528 Economy Mode 20 000 cece eee 427 Ethanol essc EUR US ee GEIS Gee gs 529 Gasoline ics se Re meas 527 Gape ce scu bett S dub ette s ded ead a rugod 295 Materials Added 000 0 530 Methanol pssst ee m eG Wea wa ea noe gas 529 Octane Rating ss sse dex Serene wee dt 527 Requirements sanns spay aurie ga mai mani syi 527 Tank Capachty sa Lk Xue xa geisiai 668 Fuel Flexible 2 ees 532 Fueling aec ehe ede we ES Ps 536 en INDEX 699 FUSES 329 daw esce eka se ae ee ba d 650 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 246 Gasoline Clean Air 2 0 0 0c es 528 Gasoline Fuel 2 00000 kr 5544034004 527 Gasoline Reformulated l l 528 Gauges Coolant Temperature less 292 nj T 295 Speedometer i a ssa eae as 291 Tachometer s 2 222 042 nE REE EEES EEE 290 Gear Ranges ses 430 General Information seres 214 Glass Cleaning s s ce cR Ree e mee a 648 Gross Axle Weight Rating llle 543 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 542 GUB uou teats sud euin anb ande deduc ae a 539 Hazard Warning Flasher
90. driveline from the powertrain It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operat ing for further information WARNING You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the power transfer unit in the NEUTRAL N position without first fully engaging the parking brake The NEUTRAL N position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle 4WD LOW This range is for low speed four wheel drive It provides an additional gear reduction which allows for increased torque to be delivered to both the front and rear wheels while providing maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h NOTE Refer to Selec Terrain If Equipped for fur ther information on the various positions and their intended usages Shifting Procedures 4WD HI To 4WD LOW With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running shift the transmission into N and push the 4WD STARTING AND OPERATING 441 LOW button once on the transfer case switch The 4WD NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met or a LOW indicator light in the instrument cluster will begin tr
91. ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 679 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A l N T E N A N o E E C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech FOR YOUR VEHICLE 004 683 Impaired TDD TTY 000 685 Prepare For The Appointment 683 Service Contract idu eR ks ue Rant e 685 Prepare A List sse cope a RR es 683 Mi WARRANTY INFORMATION 686 Be Reasonable With Requests 683 B MOPARG PARTS 00 687 E IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 683 Wi REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 687 Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 684 In The 50 United States And Washington D C llle 687 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 684 In Mexico Contact iss e n 685 M MM E E PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 682 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE MM ll DEPARTMENT OF TRANSP
92. government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety 688 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE MM PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been
93. held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear win
94. humming noise during operation this is normal WARNING e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 473 CAUTION The Anti Lock Brake System is subject to possible WARNING Continued The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can they increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or tele phones e The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sen resulting from excessive speed in turns following sation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning is normal indicating that the Anti Lock Brake System is e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must functioning never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or Traction Control System TCS the safety of others This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the sl
95. in first or second gear or third gear in 4LO range Snow mode or Sand mode Tapping at a stop will allow starting in second gear Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over speed that shift will not occur en STARTING AND OPERATING 437 The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed Holding the paddle depressed will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current speed e Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when Paddle Shift mode is enabled The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected NOTE When Selec Speed or Hill Descent Control is enabled Paddle Shift mode is not active Pushing the shift paddles in Selec Speed or Hill Descent Control simply limits the highest allowed gear Shifts below and up to that gear will occur automatically To disengage Paddle Shift mode push and hold the shift paddle until D or S is once again indicated in the instrument cluster You can shift in or out of Paddle Shift mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury 438 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN FOUR
96. injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of buckling it behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock the seat belt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re straint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Child restraint anchorages are designed to with stand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip
97. keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Continued WARNING Continued A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The seat belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body without twists If you can t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing inter nal injuries Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you Continued en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect properly In a sudden stop you could move too far you from injury during a collision You are more forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear likely to hit your he
98. locks were unlocked Remote Start will automatically lock the doors e If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button NOTE Remote Start Active Push Start Button will display in the Driver Information Display DID until you press the start button
99. max distance e Transfer Case in NEUTRAL e Tow in forward direction Wheel Lift or Front NOT ALLOWED Dolly Tow Rear OK NOT ALLOWED Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position If the vehicle s battery is discharged refer to Manual Park Release in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for towing EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 595 CAUTION Do not use sling type equipment when towing Vehicle damage may occur When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing e If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON RUN position not in the LOCK OFF position Without The Key Fob Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK OFF position The only a
100. mode will be recalled and used General Information This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS GEN 210 220 310 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 WARNING Operation is subject to the following two conditions T 2 The device may not cause harmful interference The device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration of the device Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment SEATS Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Seats If Equipped Some models may be equipped with eight way power driver and front passenger seats The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat T
101. not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems Chrysler Group LLC 15WK741 126 AB SSE RV ACCE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS RR Second Edition Rev 1 Printed in U S A
102. not used for towing Failure to do so can radio display screen along with a caution note to check result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles entire surroundings across the top of the screen After because the hitch ball will be much closer to the five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors License plate bly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle Continued 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ae When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned OFF the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned ON the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph 13 km h the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position NOTE The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro grammable modes of operation that may be selected through the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When enabled active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate
103. of aggressiveness Driver Override The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or brake application at any time While in driver override the transmission will be in ERS which is a top gear limiter and the vehicle will shift from 1st through the gear that is being displayed Deactivating HDC HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake application Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph 32 km h but remains below 40 mph 64 km h Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magni tude less than approximately 8 is on level ground or is on an uphill grade Vehicle is shifted to park ee STARTING AND OPERATING 485 Disabling HDC Feedback to the driver HDC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the The instrument cluster has a HDC icon and a HDC following conditions occur switch which has an LED which offers feedback to the e The driver presses the HDC switch driver about the state HDC is in e The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated e The parking brake is applied This is the normal operating condition for HDC The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range e Driver door opens The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the HDC switch but enable conditions are not met The vehicl
104. on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week ee STARTING AND OPERATING 497 EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours Infla
105. on the touchscreen choose a level from 3 to 3 Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Loudness If Equipped Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes To make your selection press the Loudness button on the touchscreen then choose Yes or No Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Phone Bluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Paired Phones This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Supplement Manual e Paired Audio Sources This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Supplement Manual SiriusXM Setup If Equipped After pressing the SiriusXM Setup button on the touch screen the following settings will be available e Channel Skip SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee e Subscription Information New vehicle
106. on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling 544 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN If equipped the electronic Trailer Sway Control TSC recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes and or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are com monly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic
107. operation When this rotary control is in the OFF position rotating it downward will activate the rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held Once the switch is released it will return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle several times before returning to the parked position NOTE As a protective measure the pump will stop if the switch is held for more than 20 seconds Once the switch is released the pump will resume normal operation UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281 If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the park position Rear Window Defroster ste The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap proximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating 282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the i
108. or less Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two seconds you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine NOTE Press the ESC Off switch if necessary to place the Electronic Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode before rocking the vehicle Refer to Elec tronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further information Once the vehicle has been freed press the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for Continued EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589 WARNING Continued longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the s
109. over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components ee STARTING AND OPERATING 529 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10
110. position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection press the Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting had been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM e Blind Spot Alert When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature Provides alerts visual and or audible to indicate objects in your blind spot The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deactivated To change the Blind Spot Alert status press the Off Lights or Lights amp Chime button on the touchscreen Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operatin
111. prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and mainte nance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips EE F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 689 Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and
112. procedure The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL N and the transmission must be in PARK for recreational tow ing The NEUTRAL N selection button is adjacent to the transfer case selector switch Shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL N can take place with the selector switch in any mode position outlined under Shifting into NEUTRAL N to be CAUTION DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle Towing with only one set of wheels on the ground front or rear certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL N Otherwise internal damage will result Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper tow ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar Continued on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged will cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Tow with all four wheels either ON the ground or OFF the ground using a vehicle trailer es STARTING AND OPERATING 561 Shifting Into NEUTRAL N CAUTION WARNING You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL N position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL N 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop with the engine position disengages both the front and rear drive running
113. proper position WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stabil ity for child seats and or passengers An improp erly latched seat could cause serious injury e The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Reclining Rear Seat To recline the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back and release the lever at the desired position To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever j 030909670 Rear Seat Release WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirrors and power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and a
114. radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician for help CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather This system can be operated through either the controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect system dis play When the Uconnect system is in different modes Ra dio Player Settings More etc the driver and passenger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383 General Overview Buttons On The Touchscreen Buttons On The Faceplate The buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the The buttons on the faceplate are located below the COUN BCH Sy ater Aere Uconnect screen REAR 0456004816 0456002846 Uconnect 5 0 Automatic Temperature Controls B The Touch Automatic Climate Controls Buttons On
115. reservoir brake master cylinder and power steering and fill as needed Check function of all interior and exterior lights ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 675 Required Maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for required maintenance At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System e Change oil and filter e Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on e Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required e Inspect brake pads shoes rotors drums hoses and park brake e Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses e Inspect exhaust system e Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off road conditions M A l N T E N A N o E E C H E D U L E S 8 l 676 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Sx A W Maintenance Chart N T z Mileage or time passed E N whichever comes first 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 d A RIRIS SISIR sl sx 83 8 8818 4 Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 E Or Kilometers g g g g g 8 3 g 8 8 8 g g 8 N A S AFISE SAISIS SI SJAJE Al amp il Additional Inspections E Inspect the CV joints X X X X IM Inspect front suspension tie rod MI ends and replace if necessary E c Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your ve 8 hicle for police taxi fle
116. reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero When the appropriate conditions exist this Driver Informa tion Display DID messages Refer to Driver Information Display of your owners manual for more information 16 Selectable DID Menu This area of the cluster will display the DID selectable menu For further information refer to Driver Informa tion Display DID in this section 17 Air Bag Warning Light e This light will turn on for four to eight seconds ry as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an autho rized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle of your owners manual for further information 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 18 Vehicle Security Light This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on 19 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con trol ESC is off 20 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction
117. sign on the inside of the battery by the party responsible for compliance could void the clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the user s authority to operate the equipment This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry C RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start e Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE trans mitter may reduce this range How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK Doors closed e Hood closed e HAZARD switch off e BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed Battery at an acceptable charge level ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 e RKE P
118. switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is disabled or requires service The ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled If the ParkSense switch is pressed and the system requires service the ParkSense amp switch LED will blink momentarily and then the LED will be ON 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EE Service The ParkSense Park Assist System During vehicle start up when the ParkSense System has detected a faulted condition the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS or the PARKSENSE UNAVAIL ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for five seconds When the shift lever gear selector is moved to Reverse and the system has detected a faulted condition the Driver Information Display DID will display a PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED pop up message for five seconds After five seconds a car graphic will be displayed with UNAVAILABLE at ei ther the front or rear sensor location depending on where the fault is detected The system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly These arc alerts will interrupt the PARKSENSE UNAVAIL ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS PARKSENSE UNAVAIL ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS or PARKSENSE UN AVAILAB
119. system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage berms etc However occasionally the system may alert on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Stationary Objects Opposing Traffic The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicles mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Rear Cross Path RCP The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver Tic E oe 030405522 RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects th
120. system that will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The sys tem will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If the electro hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing power steering assist then the system will pro vide mechanical steering capability CAUTION Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering assistance in order to prevent damage to the system Normal operation will resume once the system is allowed to cool If the SERVICE POWER STEERING message el and a flashing icon are displayed on the DID screen it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance Refer to Driver Information Display DID in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If the POWER STEERING HOT message and an icon are displayed on the DID screen it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists Once driving conditions are safe then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off Refer to Driver Information Display DID in Under
121. the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice For correct lug nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this section If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station Lower the jack to the fully closed position and return it and the tools to the proper positions in the foam tray Remove the small center cap and securely store the road wheel in the cargo area Stowed Spare 13 Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as soon as possible properly secure the spare tire with the special wing nut torqued to 3 7 ft lbs 5 N m reinstall the jack and tool kit foam tray and latch the rear load floor cover 582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EBENEN WARNING WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack Road Tire Installation handle counterclockwise 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 4 Refer to
122. the ESC system is reduced e Trailer Sway Control TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode 4WD Low Range Partial Off This is the normal operating mode for ESC in WD LOW range Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD HIGH range or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range the ESC system will be in the Partial Off mode Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro priate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in this sec tion for further information When TSC is functioning the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode ee STARTING AND OPERATING 479 WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer l
123. the lights off press the switch a second time The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE is pressed The front map reading lights are mounted in the over head console 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights 031433151 Front Map Reading Light Switches UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Courtesy Lights Ambient Light If Equipped The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light corner of the lens To turn the lights off press thelensa feature This light casts illumination for improved visibil second time ity of the floor and center console area ERN a 031464435 033333449 Courtesy Lights Ambient Light 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031563090 Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond t
124. the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks button on the touch screen the following settings will be available e Auto Door Locks When this feature is selected all doors will lock auto matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press the Auto Door Locks button on the touchscreen and select from On or Off Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press the Auto Unlock On Exit button on the touchscreen and select from On or Off Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 e Flash Lights w Lock When this feature is selected the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry Feature To make your selection press the Flash Lights w Lock button on the touchscreen and select from On or Off Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Horn wlLock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the Key Fob Lock button is pressed To make y
125. the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349 e Sound Horn With Lock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the door locks are activated To make your selection press either the Off Ist Press or 2nd Press button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection press the Sound Horn with Remote Start button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When Driver Door is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks only the driver s door will unlock with the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button You must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks all doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is pr
126. the vehicle has moved back to a location with left hand drive traffic ACC Operation At Stop If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while following a target vehicle if the target vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill your vehicle will resume motion without the need for any driver action If the target vehicle does not start moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release A cancel message will display on the DID and produce a warning chime Driver intervention will be required at this moment While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release A cancel message will display on the DID and produce a warning chime Driver inter vention will be required at this moment 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When the ACC system is resumed the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or Press the SET or the SET button located on the serious per
127. they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor cover ings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Continued 112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accel erator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly in stalled if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle
128. tions Each time the vehicle is started ECO mode is engaged and an amber light in the center stack of the instrument panel will be illuminated To disable ECO mode push the ECO switch in the center stack of the instrument panel and the amber light will go out indi cating ECO mode is disabled STARTING AND OPERATING 427 Fuel Economy Mode Switch When the Fuel Economy ECO Mode is engaged the vehicle control systems will change the following The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift later The torque converter clutch may engage at lower engine speeds and remain on longer 428 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN The overall driving performance will be more conser vative e Vehicles with Quadra Lift air suspension will oper ate in Aero mode over a broader speed range Refer to Quadra Lift in Starting and Operating for further information e Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhib ited based on temperature and other factors Active Noise Cancellation Summit Models Only Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancella tion System This system uses four microphones embed ded in the headliner to detect undesirable exhaust noise An onboard frequency generator creates counteracting sound waves through the audio system to help keep the vehicle quiet Eight Speed Automatic Transmission The electronic shift lever in this vehicle does not slide like a conventional sh
129. tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate fis than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully 6 INTRODUCTION Ay WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK 80bfe0t0 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could c
130. to maintain this finish CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647 Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and sho
131. to return to the previous menu e ParkView Backup Camera Delay When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned OFF the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mMm turned ON the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph 12 km h the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay push the MORE but ton on the faceplate the settings button on the touch screen then the Safety amp Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen Press the Parkview Backup camera Delay button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView amp Delay ON or OFF e Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press the Rain Sensing button on the touchscreen and make your selection Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Hill Start Assist If Equipped When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for sys
132. vehicle control resulting in severe injury or death Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall STARTING AND OPERATING 509 If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the origi nal equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types 510 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM Run Flat Tires If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles 80 km at 50 mph 80 km h after a rapid loss of inflation pressure This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode A Run Flat mode occurs when the t
133. x aces acces do st ger SR t bera To Set A Desired Speed To Deactivate c ei Gives ER EU To Resume Speed ssssssn To Vary The Speed Setting To Accelerate For Passing ll ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED cece el Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC To Activate Deactivate lise 195 To Set A Desired ACC Speed 196 To Cancels acts ye iat exc dE MES dae 197 To Tum Off cisco i d b Rx dr pd da 198 To Resim 24 0 g miti bias ERE Y x 198 To Vary The Speed Setting 199 Setting The Following Distance In ACC 201 Overtake Aid 22s odas e de ee 205 ACC Operation At Stop 00 205 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu 206 Display Warnings And Maintenance 207 Precautions While Driving With ACC 210 General Information reesen e ai 214 en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Control Mode ll FORWARD COLLISION WARNING FCW WITH MITIGATION IF EQUIPPED s eese 218 Forward Collision Warning FCW With Mitigation Operation sss sess sess sess ss 218 Turning FCW
134. your voice to send a personalized text message TIP e Not compatible with iPhone Messages are limited to 140 characters The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be illuminated to use the feature Yelp 8 4A 8 4AN Once registered with Uconnect Access you can use your voice to search for the most popular places or things around you 1 Press the Apps button on the touchscreen 2 Press the All Apps button on the touchscreen 410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3 Press the Yelp button on the touchscreen F 1 52 4 Once the YELP home screen appears on the touch yap gt Current Location screen push the VR button Sve then say YELP search 5 Listen to the system prompts and after the beep tell Uconnect the place or business that you d like Uconnect to find TIP Once you perform a search you can reorganize the results by selecting either the Best Match Rating or m P la R Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display a oe Nard Feral 0415029596 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411 SiriusXM Travel Link 8 4A 8 4AN Need to find a gas station view local movie listings check a sports score or the 5 day weather forecast SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8 4AN system Not available for 8 4A system Push the VR button vr After the beep say one of the following commands
135. 0726033346 ET 3 Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly Air Cleaner Filter Cover 1 Clean Air Hose Clamp 1 Air Cleaner Cover 2 Air Hose 2 Air Cleaner Filter 3 Spring Clips MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613 3 Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation assembly NOTE Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is T present before replacing the air filter element 1 Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface facing downward 2 Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly locating tabs 3 Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to the housing assembly Air Cleaner Filter 1 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface 614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Accessory Drive Belt Inspection However cracks running along a rib not across are not normal Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be WARNING replaced Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear frayed cords or severe glazing Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with vehicle running e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time regardless of ignition switch position You could be injured by the moving fan blades
136. 133 3 Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 130 IM rert s Ertis paa RSi es 134 dd i oM DNO 139 B BLIND SPOT MONITORING BSM IF cs cu I A EQUIPPED NP 134 Power Mirrors cise cas eee y re 131 Rear Cross Pate RCP 2 cs esas Sade seas 140 peel QU EN O Modes Of Operation 0 0 0000 00 141 qUipped scream a ERR RE ae 132 General Information 4 142 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M B SEAIS ia ee See ax AREE ERE Rcx 143 MI DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED 160 Power Seats If Equipped 144 Programming The Memory Feature 162 Power Lumbar If Equipped 146 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Manual Front Seats forward Bearward Entry Transmitter To Memory 162 Adjustment naese hinid eee 147 Memory Position Recall 163 Manual Front Passenger Seatback Easy Entry Exit Seat liess 164 Adjustment Recline ls 148 E TO OPEN AND CLOSE THEHOOD 165 eq MEM er a co MM M 166 Heated Seats If Equipped 149 Headlight Switch llle 166 Front Ventilated Seats If Equipped 152 M M NE Hos Head Restraints 1 2 2 0 00 00 0006 153 Head ign On M 60 40 Split Rear Seat isses 15
137. 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x NOTE e The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 0 C Transmission In NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the automatic transmission is in the NEUTRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 Remote Start Mode Inhibit On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote st
138. 2 While looking at Rear 1 or 2 highlight DISC by either ian pushing Up Down Left Right buttons then push 2 Press the Rear Media button to display the Rear Media ENTER OK Control screen ES Source Source 1 disc power Mmute Block out 2 Odisc ee x ee 17 0024 front media 2001 o space odyssey Select Source select source listen in M av Horm 1 Hom 2 0448010049 Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment Screen Rear Media Control Screen 366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 3 Press the 1 or 2 buttons on the touchscreen the select source button on the touchscreen and then the DISC button on the touchscreen in the MEDIA column To exit press the X at the top right of the screen 1 Source 2 NT UE power mute lock out Select Source OWE Hi av HOM 1 Horm 2 0448010053 Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen NOTE Pressing the screen on the radio while a DVD or Blu ray Disc is playing brings up the basic remote control functions for DVD play such as scene selection Play Pause FF RW and Stop Pressing the X in the upper corner will turn OFF the remote control screen functions Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously e The Blu ray Disc Player can play CDs DVDs and Blu ray Discs Selecting a video source on Rear 1 the video source will di
139. 3 Bulb Replacement poseren i tea kasd 661 Ca BO diee d tea CR EUR eR eas 276 Center Mounted Stop spaci aeeiiaii aee a 667 Daytime Running sess ele s 169 Dimmer Switch Headlight Ls 166 Exteriot s csse oes coe ew x ERG PER EE 112 IUE 22k acps CREAR ee ee rere cere See 291 Hazard Warning Flasher 0 569 Headlights ics e i 661 Headlights On With Wipers 168 High Beam Indicator 000 290 Illuminated Entry 0 nigiri 00 22 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 291 Map Reading 20 6225 8024 tasr Pe ei Roe ee 174 PASSING cse desea ee SU as Gees Ree Baas 177 Reading eee ere os 174 Rear Servicing 0 00000 664 Rear Tail Lamps 0 0 ee eee eee 664 Seat Belt Reminder 044 0 isses ee 290 Security Alarm 702 INDEX ee Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator Side Marker 333 25494 ew dep EA RT ES bed 664 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 295 Traction Control eR Ead E p aes 490 T rn Signals 12s cz e ect ger eoe ea a 112 Vanity Mirror es eccess ete s RR Du hh ses 133 Loading Vehicle soror RA 539 TAOS om v rud neg ERE MR ue dm ache dd 499 LOEKS uu Rer o ex eee dd RS GO dena 31 Automatic Door resserre miesni ts ankaa 34 Child Protection s res reres insiren ao ceea Y 34 DOOR cay aeaa ae a Ba ee EN NAUES 31 Power Door z cc ecran et ce eee 33 Lubrication Body 6 2 0 ee 621 Lug Nuts ca ch seed ih
140. 4 Bars Longest 0323001262 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EE PN JEN 0323001261 0323001260 Distance Setting 3 Bars Long Distance Setting 2 Bars Medium ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 0323001259 Distance Setting 1 Bar Short To increase the distance setting press the Distance Setting Increase button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting increases by one bar longer To decrease the distance setting press the Distance Setting Decrease button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting decreases by one bar shorter If there is no vehicle ahead the vehicle will maintain the set speed If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane the DID displays the Sensed Vehicle Indica tor icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed automati cally to maintain the distance setting regardless of the set speed EM The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor The distance setting is changed The system disengages Refer to the information on ACC Activation 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited how ever the driver can always apply the brakes manually if necessary NOTE The brake lights will illuminate wh
141. 5 min utes Rear Heated Seat Switches You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface tempera ture of the seat Front Ventilated Seats If Equipped Located in the seat cushion and seat back are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures The fans operate at two speeds HIGH and LOW The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect system You can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen e Press the ventilated sea
142. 50 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Without Trailer Tow Package 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 16 Quarts 15 2 Liters 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent With Trailer Tow Package ncludes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology Engine Oil 3 6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 such as MOPAR Pennzoil and Shell Helix Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 such as MOPAR Pennzoil and Shell Helix Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs 670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Fuel Selection 3 6L Engine 87 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 87 Octan
143. 669 SENTRY KEY FCC General Information 19 Key Programming 222 vl eei 19 Sentry Key Immobilizer llle 17 Sentry Key Replacement 000 18 Service Assistance ee ee 683 Service Contrat soper sur enenu Rbdoee o pha 685 Service Manuals llle 688 Shif ng exuere uice E Recuerde 424 Automatic Transmission 424 Shoulder Belts nss su sie each es 53 Signals TUN sss o sce ket m eee dope 112 Snow Chains Tire Chains 04 517 SNOW RIOW es va uos cei Reden e oe m Sed 556 SHOW THeS id sce arre a a Sanda ESS EE 509 Spare T6 ced e tent edo a RARE a s 511 Spark PIugs zd siren Tiea ere Bry des alld be nd 669 Speed Control Cruise Control 186 Speedomeleti users ow abe cede ea 291 DATING os eke Pine d Sa ew eae eae Edge 24 Automatic Transmission sss 419 Cold Weather ssec s e ra 422 Engine Block Heater llle 424 Engine Fails to Start 2 6 0 0 eee eee 422 Remote 24 25 6 29 ne tiriti tatr i E ERAS 24 Starting and Operating 00 419 Starting Procedures casacas neeesa oSA 419 Steering POWer amp essu c eh ENERE EEE EEE AS 464 Tilt Column lsdecs eme Rr 9 eee 183 Wheel Heated ellen 185 Wheel DIU creare mace ata ea oett ehe dt cm 183 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 378 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 378 708 INDEX ea SLOYaBe
144. 71 Tire Rotation STARTING AND OPERATING 519 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period Refer to Tires General Informa tion in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure 520 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be incr
145. 8 M M o E 194 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 169 Reclining Rear Seat son ERR 160 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Automatic Headlight Leveling HID Turn Signals oce IRR ats 176 Headlights Only 452 ek atr rr dns 170 Lane Change Assist eee 176 aec d 170 Plash 10 Pass 12d RR CERRAR Rave 177 Headlight Delay e 170 ERCP Ee Ree WRC e ducti eee Parking Lights And Panel Lights 171 NDE an ee Fog Lights If Equipped sess 171 Windshield Wiper Operation 178 Interior Lights 64 is sr Gao oa ew 172 EE x Lights On Reminder ccce 173 Windshield Washer Operation 179 Battery Savet ceccsscssesscutvenveuss 173 MSs and is do 28s SOEUR EEE OY TREES a 24 180 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 181 Front Map Reading Lights If Equipped 174 Courtesy Lights sreping iinis 175 Ambient Light If Equipped 175 Multifunction Lever sonarer arsenite riei 176 E TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN 183 ll POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED 184 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ll HEATED STEERING WHEEL I EQUIPPED jos 2 3 36 gts bBo ales RR Bela ll ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED e m OR Ce rH Rusa TO ACHV ATE s
146. ANIC button not pressed Fuel meets minimum requirement e System not disabled from previous remote start event e Vehicle security alarm not active WARNING Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in jury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death Remote Start Abort Message On Driver Information Display DID If Equipped The following messages will display in the DID if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely n Remote Start Cancelled Door Ajar Remote Start Cancelled Hood Ajar Remote Start Cancelled Fuel Low e Remote Start Cancelled System Fault e Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle to Reset The DID message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON RUN position 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To Enter Remote Start Mode Push and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash vehicle doors will lock and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Once the vehicle has started the engine will run for 15 minutes NOTE e If your power door
147. ARNING Vehicle Security Alarm For personal security and safety in the event of a collision lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause se vere personal injuries or death e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be Manual Door Lock Knob warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector e 021809601 Continued THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING Continued Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks The power door lock switch is located on each front door panel Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors cM Power Door Lock Switch If the door lock switch is pressed down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door If the door lock switch is pressed whil
148. ARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105 1 Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available 2 To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear seat pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back this will expose the top tether strap anchor ages 022633426 Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap Anchorage 106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint 4 For the center seating position route the tether strap over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to z d 1 the tether anchor located on the back of the seat 5 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram Top Tether Strap Anchorage Located on Seatback 3 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head THINGS
149. Alaska Services can only be used where coverage is available see coverage map for details i 9 1 1 Call A Theft Alarm Notification fm Remote Door Lock Unlock 4 Stolen Vehicle Assistance O Remote Vehicle Start Remote Horn and Lights Yelp Search Voice Texting i Roadside Assistance Call Wi Fi Hotspot Tf vehicle is equipped Extra charges apply mmmmmmE C UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407 Register 8 4A 8 4AN 1 Press the Apps button on the bottom of the 8 4 inch touchscreen If a pop up message appears press Register or go to the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect Regis tration Read through the registration instructions Enter and confirm your personal email address Then press Send Check your personal inbox for an email from Uconnect Access Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and complete the easy online registration process to create a personal Mopar Owner Connect account linked to your vehicle Settings Travel Link y Media Cor ate a Uconnect Registration 8 4A 8 4AN 408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Mobile App 8 4A 8 4AN Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the Uconnect Access App Once you have downloaded the App you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually any distance Vehicle must be properly equipped with factory installed Remote St
150. C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 690 WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE MM excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 692 INDEX eee About Yo
151. CLE EBENEN The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as neces sary The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected periodically not just when wiper performance problems are experienced This inspection should include the fol lowing points Wear Or Uneven Edges Foreign Material e Hardening Or Cracking e Deformation Or Fatigue MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623 If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged replace the a
152. Call The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers e Roadside Assistance If you get a flat tire or need a tow just press the Assist button and you ll be con nected to someone who can help Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you re driving and its location Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance Uconnect Access Customer Care In vehicle support for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile features e Vehicle Customer Care Total support for all other vehicle issues 9 1 1 Call 1 Press the 9 1 1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror NOTE In case the 9 1 1 Call button is pushed in error there will be a 10 second delay before the 9 1 1 Call system initiates a call to a 9 1 1 operator To cancel the 9 1 1 Call connection press the 9 1 1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Phone Screen Termination of the 9 1 1 Call will turn the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off 2 The LED light located between the Assist and 9 1 1 buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to a 9 1 1 operator has been made 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee 3 Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9 1 1 operator is made the 9 1 1 Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a 9 1 1 operator Indication that the occupant placed a 9 1 1 Call e T
153. Child Seat Installation 0 103 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt 99 Infants And Child Restraints 85 Install A LATCH compatible Child Restraint 98 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt ss 2 2 a ke eR Leg ex s 100 LATCH Positions llle 91 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children 90 Older Children And Child Restraints 86 ee INDEX 695 Seating Positions e Reed a ae 89 Child Safety Locks usd ape ahd Mee aen 34 Clean Air Gasoline 0 eee eee ee 528 Cleaning Wheels neue x adele die ede ee d 646 Climate Control sed kr Rer ERR Ran 382 Automatic siiaseca css ho PR Red 382 Cold Weather Operation lille 422 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 380 Compact Spare Tire llle 511 Console Overhead llle 244 Contract Service uoti ainra EEan EN 685 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 635 Cooling System ecg seiras ga sedy eaaa 632 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 0 0 634 Coolant Capacity 6 6 eee 668 Coolant Level aea RERO oe 636 Disposal of Used Coolant 636 Drain Flush and Refill 0 633 Inspection 2x aig coesa eer ee new d 632 Points to Remember less 637 Pressure Cap 222222 Re E d 635 Radiator Cap siue pro Red 635 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 633 Corrosion Protection 0
154. DING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 e Show Time In Status Bar If Equipped This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting press the Show Time in Status Bar button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Safety amp Driving Assistance After pressing the Safety amp Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail able e Forward Collision Warning If Equipped The Front Collision Warning FCW feature provides an audible and or visual warning to potential forward collisions The feature can be can be set to Far or set to Near The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you To change the FCW status press and release the Near or Far button Then press the back arrow button on the touch screen For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRU
155. Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381 Regulatory And Safety Information USA CANADA Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits Nevertheless the wireless radio shall be used in such a manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human body The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recom mendations which reflect the consensus of the scientific community The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use
156. E transmitter 3 If any doors are open close them ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 To Disarm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter e Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position NOTE The driver s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during power liftgate entry Pressing the liftgate button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and
157. ERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MMM e Set Language When in this display you may select one of multiple languages English Francais Espafiol for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navi gation system if equipped Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen then select the desired lan guage button on the touchscreen Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Units When in this display you may select to have the DID odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of measure Press US or Metric until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when button on the touchscreen is pressed Press the Touchscreen Beep button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Controls Screen Time Out When in this display you may turn on or shut off the ability for the controls screen to time out Press the Controls Screen Time Out button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow
158. GS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE How The Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever ity and type of the impact AU Q 7 022607508 Active Head Restraint AHR Components 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam and Trim 2 Seatback 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 WARNING All occupants including the driver should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision NOTE For more infor
159. HICLE 217 To Decrease Speed When the Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is set you can decrease speed by pressing the SET button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed of U S mph or Metric km h units U S Speed mph Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is re flected in the DID display Metric Speed kmlh e Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km h e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is re flected in the DID display To Cancel The following conditions will cancel the Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Control without clearing the memory The brake pedal is applied e The CANCEL button is pressed The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee The vehi
160. ING AND OPERATING 505 WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering NOTE Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor mal wear patterns and reduced tread life resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride 506 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door At least once a month Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket type pressure gauge Do not make a visual judge ment when determining proper inflation Tires may look properly inflated even when they are un
161. If Equipped 481 Tire Pressur 3 4258 4 ei RR bees 504 Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped Tire Inflation Pressures llus 506 oue vec uve Moe ae Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 507 Two Speed Transfer Case Only 482 416 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Radial Ply Tires 005 507 Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Tire Types cies e 508 Los E 923 Run Flat Tres Equipped 510 Service Tpm System Warning 525 Spare Tires If Equipped isses 510 General Information 0 527 Tire Spinning sececeriberzb 9i rer dig 513 M FUEL REQUIREMENTS 527 Tread Wear Indicators 00 513 Sel Engine JCPQUIDUPH s see kearah ind Vs OP TuS ceste dobererptees ii 514 M E 9d Replacement Tires llle 515 Ro ioprn late GASOLIE vere s sme ud ae lI TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES 517 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 529 E TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 518 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 529 WI TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS 519 T MMT In Gasoline esses d Premium System ccce ee 522 Materials Added To Fuel 530 Fuel System Cautions 00 581 E FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY IF
162. Jeep _ 2015 Grand Cherokee OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public trans portation Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Jeep Jeep is a registered trademark of Chrysler Group LI C Copyright 2014 C
163. LE SERVICE REQUIRED messages if an object is detected within the five second pop up duration The car graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Refer to Driver Information Display DID for further information If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN SORS appears in the Driver Information Display DID make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia bumper and or front fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer If the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE QUIRED message appears in the DID see an authorized dealer mmmm UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense amp System Usage Precautions NOTE e e Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off the instrument cluster will display PARKSENSE OFF Furthermo
164. M and Electronic Stability Control ESC All five of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions Also your vehicle may be equipped with Trailer Sway ram Control TSC Hill Start Assist HSA Ready Alert Braking RAB Rain Brake Support RBS and if it has four wheel drive with the MP 3023 two speed transfer case Hill Descent Control HDC Selec Speed Control SSC 472 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Anti Lock Brake System ABS The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer WARNING Significant over or underinflation of tires or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The Anti Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If for any reason your foot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph 20 km h this check will be delayed until 25 mph 40 km h The Anti Lock Brake System pump motor runs during the self test and during an ABS stop to provide the regulated hydraulic pressure The motor pump makes a low
165. MENT PANEL Se Forward Collision Warning FCW Active Braking If Equipped The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist ABA When this feature is selected the ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision The ABA system becomes active at 5 mph 8 km h To make your selection press the Forward Collision Warning FCW with Mitigation Active Braking button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting had been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu For further information refer to For ward Collision Warning FCW With Mitigation in Un derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e ParkSense The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h It will provide an alert audible and or visual to indicate the proximity to other objects The system can be enabled with Sound Only or Sound and Display To change the ParkSense status press and release the Sound or Sound and Display button Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen Refer to ParkSense in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for sys tem function and operating information E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 e Front ParkSense Chime
166. Maintenance Ignition Off Operation E ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ll POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED ill CUPHOLDERS E STORAGE Glove Compartment Door Storage suana eaaa ea Da n Console Features CARGO AREA FEATURES Rechargeable Flashlight Cargo Storage Bins E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Retractable Cargo Area Cover Rear Window Wiper Washer 280 IE EQUIBBSG it perdat abi pel anode cid Rear Window Defroster 281 Rear Cargo Tie Downs 04 279 E ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED 282 E REAR WINDOW FEATURES 280 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind shield The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while the small contro
167. Mobile Phones Lap tops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 15 6 V7 V8 V9 Compass Variance Map 040506040 e Perform Compass Calibration Press the Calibration button on the touchscreen to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic until it is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON button on the touchscreen and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects The compass will now function normally Audio After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available Equalizer When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 the scale between the and buttons on the touchscreen Press the back arrow Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e BalancelFade This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings Press and drag the speaker icon or use the arrows to adjust tap the C icon to readjust to the center Press the back arrow Done button on the touchsc
168. ND OPERATING EE CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Start Keyless Enter N Go Key Fob is in the passenger compartment Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START STOP Button 1 The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL 2 Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START STOP button once 3 The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds ee STARTING AND OPERATING 421 4 If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting push the button again NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever gear selector in PARK then push and release the ENGINE START STOP button
169. NG TIPS NOTE Prior to off road driving with non Summit mod els that are also equipped with an Off Road Package remove the lower fascia to prevent damage The lower fascia is attached to the lower part of the front fascia with seven quarter turn fasteners and can be removed by hand The front license plate bracket must be removed first if equipped STARTING AND OPERATING 455 B XARA RACCOON KKK oO IT EEK EBD 053810760 Front Air Dam 1 Front Bumper 2 Front Air Dam Fasteners NOTE On Summit models the lower front fascia is not removable 456 STARTING AND OPERATING Emm Lower Front Fascia Removal 1 2 Remove the seven quarter turn fasteners Starting on one side of the vehicle disengage lower fascia from the upper fascia Grasp the portion inside the wheel well Pulling it downwards and toward you separate the tabs from the slots in the upper fascia Continue working your way across the vehicle sepa rating the remaining tabs from the slots in the upper fascia NOTE Do not allow the lower fascia to freely hang from the tabs in the opposite corner as damage to lower and upper fascia may result 4 Store the lower fascia in a safe location NOTE It is recommend to also remove the radar sensor on vehicle equipped to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC This radar sensor is specifically calibrated to your vehicle and is not interchangeable with other radar sensors Radar sensor removal procedure
170. O KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WINDOWS Power Windows The power window controls are located on the driver s door trim panel There is a single switch on the front passenger door and rear doors which operate the front passenger and rear passenger door windows The win dow controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position Power Window Switches The power window switches remain active for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Sg down automatically To cancel the Auto Down move WARNING ment operate the switch in either the up or down Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do direction and release the switch not let children play with power windows Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the To open the window part way push to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode Occupants particularly unattended children can become en trapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an Auto Down feature Push the window swi
171. ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 603 ll EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS 604 E REPLACEMENT PARTS 000 605 E DEALER SERVICE 00000 eee 605 ll MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 606 Engine OH isole RE REI E 607 Engine Oll Filter i onset 610 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 611 Accessory Drive Belt Inspection 614 Maintenance Free Battery 615 Air Conditioner Maintenance 616 Body Lubrication srie draia Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System 000000000 629 O Cooling System 0 000000 632 Brake System asa sans eae e Ree 638 600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Front Rear Axle Fluid 0 640 Transfer Cas i exc E rea etm ead 641 Automatic Transmission s 642 Appearance Care And Protection From COFFOSIOIA cedo see dred eee bee ed 644 Ba FUSES ae see eed a R9 EU REESE 650 Power Distribution Center 651 B VEHICLE STORAGE 0 658 E REPLACEMENT BULBS 659 E BULB REPLACEMENT 661 High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID I Equipped Lise xd a ohn a eee oss 661 Halogen Headlamps If Equipped 662
172. ORTATION UNIFORM Traction Grades 0 00000 689 TIRE QUALITY GRADES 689 Treadwea xem amp 4 a acetone vu SET 689 Temperature Grades 000000 690 en F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 683 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty servi
173. Off mode for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the BLD feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC OFF switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momen tarily pressing the ESC OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion 478 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN WARNING e When in Partial Off mode the TCS functionality of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated When in Partial Off mode the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by
174. Off position Fog Lights If Equipped The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight switch to the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary control 031409584 Fog Light Operation The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or the high beam is selected Interior Lights Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened or when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the right side of the headlight switch is rotated to its farthest upward position If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry RKE and the UNLOCK button is pressed on the RKE transmitter the courtesy and dome lights will turn on When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control up brighter or dow
175. Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800
176. Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel nn THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113 Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks 2o Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid if equipped or brake fluid leaks are suspected The cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B MIRRORS ssssee piin is 123 Heated Mirrors If Equipped Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped 123 Tilt Mirrors In Reverse Available With Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 124 Meno osent Ones BOEQUIBDEd ssh tinere 14 Outside Mirrors NER 130 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
177. Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 13 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera ture settings or on the touchscreen press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 14 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button on the faceplate for warmer tem perature settings or on the touchscreen press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 15 Temperature Control 5 0 Radio Only Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to regu late the temperature of the air inside the passenger com partment Moving the temperature bar into the red area indicates warmer temperatures Moving the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389 Climate Control Functions A C Air Conditioning The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system Wh
178. Quadra Trac II transfer case The optional ELSD axle is fully automatic and requires no driver input to operate Under normal driving conditions the unit functions as a standard axle balancing torque evenly between left and right wheels With a traction difference between left and right wheels the coupling will sense a speed difference As one wheel begins to spin faster than the other torque will automatically transfer from the wheel that has less traction to the wheel that has traction While the transfer case and axle coupling differ in design their operation is similar Follow the Quadra Trac II transfer case shifting informa tion preceding this section for shifting this system SELEC TERRAIN IF EQUIPPED Description Selec Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle control systems along with driver input to provide the best performance for all terrains 0582003301 Selec Terrain Switch Selec Terrain consists of the following positions e Snow Tuning set for additional stability in inclement weather Use on and off road on loose traction surfaces such as snow When in Snow mode depending on certain operating conditions the transmission may use second gear rather than first gear during launches to minimize wheel slippage If equipped with air suspension the default ride height for Snow is NRH Auto Fully automatic full time four wheel drive operation can be used on and off road B
179. RERO RERSZP Brake System scere sre wee we Rr dd Anti Lock ABS 0 0 eee eee Fluid Check ss ier eR RR Master Cylinder llli Parking s e es bare kare Re Eu EX SUME WE Warning Light cesses amete s em etw Brake Transmission Interlock 694 INDEX MMM Bulb Replacements eas ss vxo m hem d 659 Bulbs Light 3 uere RR opos 112 Camera REAT ius aede bth dob hee kee de a 241 Capacities Fluid scis Ex ed end 668 Caps Filler Oil Engine mert oda eG RR bem cine be we 609 POWer Steering 5 oso eee wailed EA 467 Radiator Coolant Pressure 635 Carbon Monoxide Warning 66 109 Cargo Area Cover 6 ee eee 277 Cargo Area Features 6 sells 274 Cargo Compartimento erasia f angna Ca pai 0 00 274 Light 22232 x ba aret Blas ed Ep a pa 276 Cargo Lights oo cies arf ee eem bes er 276 Cargo Tie Downs 1 6 0 279 Car Washes iu sis sated wis ain ead ceo rato 644 Cellular Phone s oct Sex ee rer s 380 Center High Mounted Stop Light 667 Certification Label illie 539 Chairs D peses inat Ee cp head ane dr ee PIER SP Us 517 Chart Dre Sizing ssepe bk e 493 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 604 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety Ls 109 Checks Safety ies ao ee drap rn ere 109 Child Restraints s rea 3 244 044 0 a Deom odes 83 Child Restraints Booster Seats ete DETUR Eye 87 Child Restraints llle 83
180. SA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the Continued WARNING Continued brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll down the hill and could cause a collision with another ve hicle or object Always remember to use the park ing brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 481 HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done using the Uconnect Access Settings Refer to Uconnect Access Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Ready Alert Braking If Equipped Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations It anticipates when an emergen
181. SC Driveline is in 4WD Low Range Vehicle speed is below 5mph 8 km h Parking brake is released Driver door is closed Driver is not applying throttle Activating SSC Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically once the following conditions are met Driver releases throttle Driver releases brake Transmission is in any selection other than P Vehicle speed is below 20 mph 32 km h 488 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver and can e 7th 43 mph 7 km h be adjusted by using the paddle shifter s The following B summarizes the SSC set speeds oih cS0 mphte km h NOTE e P No set speed SSC may be enabled but will not activate e During SSC the paddle shifter input is used for B SSC target speed selection and will put the transmis x e sion into ERS but will not affect the gear chosen by the e N 1 2 mph 2 km h transmission unless in Driver Override During SSC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver a a selected set speed and corresponding driving condi e 2nd 1 2 mph 2 km h tions e 3rd 1 8 mph 3 km h e SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select e 4th 2 5 mph 4 km h mode This difference may be notable to the driver and may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness e 5th 3 1 mph 5 km h e 6th 3 7 mph 6 km h ee STARTING AND OPERATING 489 Driver Override The driver may override SSC activ
182. SE Remote Control Lock Out Press to enable disable Remote Control functions 5 RSE Channel 2 Mode Indicates the current source for Screen 2 Channel 2 This button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen Channel being controlled by the front user If this button is not highlighted select button to access controls for Screen 2 Channel 2 source 6 Radio Full Screen Mode Select this button to change to Full Screen Mode 7 Cabin Audio Mode Select this button to change the cabin audio to the rear entertainment source currently shown on the rear media control screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363 8 RSE Mode Select this button to change source for the active high lighted rear Screen Channel on the rear media control screen Press the Media button on the touchscreen then press the Rear Media button on the touchscreen Press the OK button on the touchscreen to begin playing the Blu ray Disc on the touchscreen radio Using The Remote Control e Select an audio channel Rear 1 for driver side rear screen and Rear 2 for passenger side rear screen then press the source key and using the up and down arrows highlight disc from the menu and press the OK button Press the popup menu key to navigate the disc menu and options Play Video Games Connect the video game console to the Audio Video RCA HDMI input jacks located on the side of each seat 0449012548 Audio Video RCA HDMI Inpu
183. STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant s midsection Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click In Automatic Locking Mode the shoulder belt is auto matically pre locked The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted 3 Al
184. Solid 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes Reduced NOTE ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone Front Park Assist Audible Alerts ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert chime after approximately 3 seconds when an obstacle has been detected the vehicle is stationary and brake pedal is applied ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 Adjustable Chime Volume Settings Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The chime volume settings include LOW MEDIUM and HIGH The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch Pya OFF When the ParkSense switch is pressed to disable the system the instrument cluster will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for approximately five seconds Refer to Driver Information Display DID in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is dis abled the DID will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE The ParkSense
185. Sound and Display To change the ParkSense status press and release the Sound Only or Sounds and Display button Then press the back arrow button on the touch screen Refer to ParkSense in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and oper ating information e Tilt Mirrors In Reverse When this feature is selected the exterior sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever gear selector is in the REVERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmis sion is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection press the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse button on the touch screen and make your selection Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the shift lever gear selector is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear To make your selection press the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines button on the touchscreen and make your selection Press arrow button on the touchscreen
186. TANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EBENEN The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is necessary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed Continued WARNING Continued It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a bra
187. TARTING AND OPERATING 549 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle The tongue weight of the trailer The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading In formation Placard in Starting and Operating for fur ther information 550 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow thes
188. TING AND OPERATING 535 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg Kilometers per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability 536 STARTING AND OPERATING ADDING FUEL 1 Press the fuel filler door release switch located under the headlamp switch 0568004000 Fuel Filler Door NOTE In cer
189. TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS sensor to become inoperable After using an after market tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 15 Driver Information Display DID The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If she he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly
190. Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades e Remove any metal jewelry such as rings watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery NOTE Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables do not touch while still connected to the other vehicle 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri J ump Starting Procedure cal accessories 3 Remove the protective cover over the remote positive iss alise battery post Pull upward on the cover to remove it Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in 4 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle could establi
191. The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position e The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec tion Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body struct
192. Torque Table for proper lug nut torque 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly lug nuts seated against the wheel EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583 JUMP STARTING CAUTION If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen Precautions It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury 584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations For J ump Start The battery in your vehicle is located under the passen ger s front seat There are remote locations located under the hood to assist in jump starting 2 0608042624 Remote Battery Posts 1 Remote Positive Post covered with protective cap 2 Remote Negative Post WARNING e
193. Volume The Front ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be selected from the Driver Information Display DID or Uconnect System if equipped The chime volume settings include LOW MEDIUM and HIGH The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM To make your selec tion press the ParkSense Front Chime Volume button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting had been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles e Rear ParkSense Chime Volume The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be se lected from the DID or Uconnect System if equipped The chime volume settings include LOW MEDIUM and HIGH The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM To make your selection press the ParkSense Rear Chime Volume button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting had been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles e Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse When this feature is selected the exterior side view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous
194. able increase blower speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side win dows Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393 NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur e Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will automati cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield When this occurs recirculation will be unavailable Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instruc tions 394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mMm Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS Hot weather and Senna As eon gt o vehicle interior is very control to af AIC on and blower on high Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out the hot air Once comfort is achieved adjust controls for comfo
195. able through the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information The default status of FCW is the Far setting and the Active Braking is the On setting this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away and it applies limited braking This gives you the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Changing the FCW status to the Near setting allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much closer This setting provides less reaction time than the Far setting which allows for a more dynamic driving experience NOTE e The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down e FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects ground reflections objects not in the path of the car stationary objects that are far away oncoming traffic or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed e FCW will be disabled like ACC with the unavailable screens FCW Limited Warning If the DID displays ACC FCW Limited Functionality or ACC FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind shield momentarily there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditio
196. ack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Continued Jack Location The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located in rear cargo area below the load floor Jack Storage Location WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573 NOTE The funnel for the Cap Less Fuel System is located on top of the spare tire If your vehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is needed insert the funnel into the filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle For vehicles not equipped with a spare tire the fuel filler funnel is stored in the left storage bin under the load floor For more information on the Cap Less Fuel System refer to Adding Fuel in Starting And Operating in this manual Spare Tire Stowage The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in the rear cargo area and is secured to the body with a special wing nut 574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE Preparations For J acking WARNING CAUTION Always lift or jack the vehicle from the correct Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack jacking points Failure to follow this information or changing the wheel could cause damage to the vehicle or underbody components 2 Turn on
197. ad in a collision if you do not your seat belt snugly wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger are meant to be used together ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck collision and leave you with no protection Inspect injury A seat belt worn under the arm can cause the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be re bones Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that placed immediately Do not disassemble or modify your strongest bones will take the force in a colli the seat belt system Seat belt assemblies must be sion replaced after a collision Continued 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat and next to your arm in the rear seat for vehicles equipped with a rear seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3 When the seat belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click
198. adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position e Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position the ESC system will be ON even if it was cycled off previously except for when the vehicle is started while in 4L Range e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation b OFF The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is partially off or full off 492 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings D Lars rg v NO 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load Code TIN 5 Maximum Pressure 2 Size Designation 6 Treadwear Traction and 3 Service Description Temperature Grades NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from th
199. additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level only OAT coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 90032 should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at a minimum of 50 OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components 638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle over
200. adian Gate Operator Programming Using HomeLink 0 244 245 246 246 247 DOCUIEY cd aceite TA Pa a E wie ajos 253 Troubleshooting Tips llle 254 General Information 0 255 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 255 Opening Sunroof Express 256 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 257 Closing Sunroof Express 257 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 257 Pinch Protect Feat ire s sse sess tacones s da 257 Venting Sunroof Express 258 Sunshade Operation 00 258 Wind Buffeting 2 ee e eas 258 Sunroof Maintenance 00 258 Ignition Off Operation ss s s s sess sess sissa 259 E COMMANDVIEWG SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE IF EQUIPPED 259 Opening Sunroof Express 260 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 261 Closing Sunroof Express 261 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 261 Opening Power Shade Express 261 Opening Power Shade Manual Mode 261 Closing Power Shade Express 262 Closing Power Shade Manual Mode 262 Venting Sunroof Express 262 Pinch Protect Feature 262 Wind Buffeting Sunroof
201. adio Refer to Uconnect Access Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING The air suspension system uses a high pressure volume of air to operate the system To avoid per sonal injury or damage to the system see your authorized dealer for service Air Suspension Modes The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect the system in unique situations Tire Jack Mode To assist with changing a spare tire the air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled Refer to Uconnect Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running Transport Mode To assist with flat bed towing the air suspension system has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry Exit height and disable the automatic load leveling system Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 452 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN NOTE This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running Wheel Alignment Mode Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling disabling of air suspension fe
202. aieo enc koe x Rem e x e dec Pac a 272 Storage Vehicle si kc ace dash Ron er OR Re eda 392 storing Your Vehicle 1 253 ei4 Re Ex 9 nd 658 Sunglasses Storage aves ce oe wa c e eds 246 Sun Roof io epa tee epe vd eS SEE Wee a 255 Suni Visor EXL nsiOfi aaa ee Ra a e Rede 134 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 68 Suspension ATE Spira qoi preme Va e eed s 447 Sway Control Trailer sey sester llis 478 Synthetic Engine Oil sner gasea seepi ee 609 System Remote Starting 000 24 Tachometer sos tessi esee eme val Page oe was 290 Telescoping Steering Column 183 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 390 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 292 Tie Down Hooks Cargo lille 279 Tilt Steering Col mfic exar eR xe aes 183 Tire and Loading Information Placard 499 Tie Markings aruis em e em wal 492 TeS mesana wh Sete sagen E RU ENS ENDE ENTERA eres nds 112 Aging Life of Tires 00 514 Ait Pressure 4 veas os Ba CRI RT ee ao d 504 COhaitiS teen Lin eee OPENS ee edi 517 Compact Spates c sacas shee dor RR be dou eo 511 General Information llle 504 HighSpeed s s eased anes ened 507 Inflation Pressures 0 0 0 0 ee 506 Life Of Tires iiia koe a eee erc eed s 514 Load Capacity sse eror RR 499 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 519 Pressure Warning Light 295 Quality Grading an a e
203. alances traction with seamless steering feel to provide im proved handling and acceleration over two wheel drive vehicles If equipped with air suspension the level will change to NRH 446 STARTING AND OPERATING EE e Sand Off road calibration for use on low traction surfaces such as sand or wet grass Driveline is maxi mized for traction Some binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces The electronic brake controls are set to limit traction control management of throttle and wheel spin If equipped with air suspension the default ride height for Sand is NRH Mud Off road calibration for use on low traction surfaces such as mud Driveline is maximized for traction Some binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces The electronic brake controls are set to limit traction control management of throttle and wheel spin If equipped with air suspension the level will change to Off Road 1 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 447 e Rock Off road calibration only available in WD Low range The vehicle is raised if equipped with Air Suspension for improved ground clearance Traction based tuning with improved steer ability for use on high traction off road surfaces Use for low speed obstacles such as large rocks deep ruts etc If equipped with air suspension the vehicle level will change to Off Road 2 If the Selec Terrain switch is in ROCK mode and the transfer case is switched from 4WD Low to 4WD High the Selec Terrain sys
204. all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out side the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle To Unlock Enter The Liftgate The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the liftgate press the electronic liftgate release for a power open on vehicles equipped with Power Liftgate Press the electronic lift gate release and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles NOTE If the vehicle is unlocked then the liftgate will open with the electronic liftgate release and no RKE Transmitter is required 0222003451 Passive Entry Lock Button Location 1 Electronic Liftgate Release 2 Lock Button Location en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 To Lock The Liftgate NOTE The key must be within 5 ft 1 5 m of the handle being used to lock the vehicle With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the liftgate press the passive entry lock button located to the right of electronic lift
205. all the socket and reattach the lamp assembly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665 Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the lower trim from the liftgate 3 Continue removing the trim 4 Disconnect the two trim panel lights 666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE PO 073374394 0733003304 Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps 1 Auxiliary LED Tail Connector Do Not Remove 5 Tail lamps are now visible Rotate socket s counter 2 Backup Bulb Socket clockwise 6 Remove replace bulb s 7 Reinstall the socket s 8 Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL Rear License Lamp The center high mounted stop lamp is LED Service at 1 The rear license lamps are LED Service at Authorized Authorized Dealer Dealer 073374395 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 3 6L and 5 7L Engines 25 Gallons 94 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 Quarts 5 6 Liters 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters Cooling System 3 6L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 10 4 Quarts 9 9 Liters 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 15 4 Quarts 14 6 Liters 1
206. ally after approximately 45 minutes NOTE The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the heated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information Rear Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the two rear outboard seats may be equipped with heated seats There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently The heated seat switches for each heater are located on the rear of the center console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation At 030909669 that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 4
207. amming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer 0000 Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 T 2 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand held transmitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly push and release the LEARN or TRAIN ING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a
208. an invitation to thieves Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle cycle the ignition OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended SENTRY KEYG The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses a Key Fob with a factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter a Keyless Ignition Node KIN and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will not allow the engine to crank with an invalid Key Fob After placing the ignition to the ON RUN position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the system In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the system Should this occur have the vehicle servic
209. an the child sit all the way back against the back of cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments the vehicle seat Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve hicle seat position When the vehicle seat has been adjusted reinstall the child restraint When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in between their neck and arm the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 4 Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible WARNING touching the child s thighs and not their stomach Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back In a crash the shoulder belt 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to any of these questions was no then the will not protect a child properly which may result in child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the serious injury or death A child must always wear child is using the lap shoulder belt check belt fit peri both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt odical
210. ance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Automatic Locking Retractor ALR If Equipped The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac tors ALR which is used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section of this manual The table below defines the type of feature for each seating posi tion 022668725 e ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor e Zi Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE
211. and away from the windshield 3 Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade under the release tab T 4 Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against the wiper arm Fold down the latch release tab and 1 Wiper Blade snap it into its locked position Latch engagement will 2 Wiper Arm be accompanied by an audible click 3 Release Tab 5 Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass 4 Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass 626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Rear Wiper Blade Removal Installation 1 Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass NOTE The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle 0726033340 Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position 1 Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 Wiper Arm 2 Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position 1 Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 Wiper Arm 3 Wiper Blade MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627 3 To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm grasp the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm with your right hand With your left hand hold the wip
212. and other low powered electrical accessories The power outlets are labeled with either a key or a battery symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Power outlets labeled with a key are powered when CAUHON the ignition is in the ON or ACC position while the ee outlets labeled with a battery are connected directly to Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only the battery and powered at all times Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as NOTE this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage All accessories connected to the battery powered not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge To ensure proper cigar lighter operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 The front power outlet is located inside the storage area In addition to the front power outlet there is also a power on the center stack of the instrument panel Push inward outlet located in the storage ai area of the center console on the storage lid to open the compartment and gain access to this power outlet 034773368 Center Console Outlet 034773369 Front Power Outlet 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se The re
213. ansfer case motor temperature protection condition to flash and remain on solid when the shift is complete exists a For 4x4 Low Slow Below 3 mph 5 km h Put Trans in N Press 4 Low message will flash from the Driver Information Display DID Refer to Driver In formation Display DID in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information 4WD LOW To 4WD HI With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and push the AWD LOW button once on the transfer case switch The AWD LOW indicator light in the instrument cluster 0582003229 will flash and go out when the shift is complete Transfer Case Switch 442 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Shifting Into NEUTRAL N WARNING e If shift conditions interlocks are not met or a transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists a For 4x4 High Slow Below 3 mph 5 km h Put Trans in N push 4 Low message will flash from the Driver Information Display DID Refer to Driver Informa tion Display DID in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information e Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being prop erly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur The preferred m
214. ap Shoulder Belts 0000 53 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting 58 Pregnant Women 0060 60 Seat Belt Extender llle 59 Seat Belt Pretensioner 00 000 cee 60 Seat Belt Reminder 0 0 0 0 0c eee 52 Seat Belt Maintenance llle 649 Seat Belt Reminder 0 0 0 0 eee eae 52 Seat Bell 4 i EU Re dise aie scan eran RC 51 Adjustable Shoulder Belt 0 0 58 706 INDEX ea Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 58 Child Restraint sasasi eter ansa icem tent cen 83 Extender 222 2224 9999 i dedturdide s 59 Front Seat scian oe he iaae s ea ee he a o 51 Inspection uod te OES ene EE ee ede eS 110 Operating Instructions 56 Pregnant Women s ossia e Rr ras sened 60 Pretensioniers s sd escogido xe rh ead 60 Rear Seat say a5 uere e e wR a Eu 53 Renmu nder sesoset br m RHOD e eqs 290 Untwisting Procedure 0000 58 CATS oaa tee Saba soe db d av aaa tes Bes a a 143 Adjustment 2 oie eee eee a Rr 147 Easy Entry ia nea tule Seles aes ea qus 164 MEMO e e a cachet sspe RR S ORE RES 160 Rear Folding 0 000000 000000 158 RecN iore eres Sig eet wn de e ee db uod 148 Security Alans ost sve sedo ku a e eR Rae 19 Arm The System Lap ae e e nr e rs 20 ee INDEX 707 Tamper Ale tt csc cesia e e o o s 22 Secunty System ases one ak PAS Goa is 19 Selec Terrain lees 445 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze LL
215. ar power outlet is located in the right rear cargo NOTE The rear power outlet can be switched from area switched ignition only to constant battery powered all the time See your local authorized dealer for details 034609793 Rear Power Outlet Power Outlet Right Rear Ouarter Panel Fuse UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin 2 F90 F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel 3 F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the bat tery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with greater caution After the use of high powe
216. area The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when needed The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries Lower Storage Compartment CD DVD Player If that recharge when snapped back into place Equipped UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275 Press in on the flashlight to release it To operate the flashlight press the switch once for high 1 twice for low and a third time to return to off Rom C M pus 31 pcm poo 035410217 Press And Release Three Press Switch 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Cargo Storage Bins Two additional storage bins are located under the load There are up to four removable storage bins located in the floor To access the lower storage bins raise the load floor rear cargo area There are two storage bins located on either and attach the tether hook attached to the bottom of the side of the cargo area load floor to the liftgate opening NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a rear subwoofer the passenger side cargo area will not be available Tether Strap Rear Storage Bin UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277 Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped NOTE The purpose of this cover is for privacy not to secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo To cover the cargo area 3 o 1 Grasp the cover at the center
217. art Mobile App 0415028348 Download the Uconnect amp Access App to a compatible Apple or Android mobile devices All you need to do is 1 After registering with Uconnect amp Access log on to your Mopar amp Owner Connect account at moparownerconnect com On the Dashboard page enter your mobile phone number to receive a link to download the App on your mobile device Or go to iTunesG or Google Play and search for the Uconnect Access App To activate the App enter your Mopar Owner Connect user name and password and log in Your vehicle is then connected to your mobile device mmmmm UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409 Voice Texting 8 4A 8 4AN 1 To send a message push the Phone button After the beep say the following command Send mes sage to John Smith Listen to the prompt After the beep dictate the message you would like to send Wait for Uconnect to process your message The Uconnect system will repeat your message and provide a variety of options to add to delete send or hear the message again After the beep tell Uconnect what you d like to do For instance if you re happy with your message after the beep say Send You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a compatible MAP enabled smartphone to use
218. art mode Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position rain sensing wiper operation can resume if it has been selected and no other inhibit conditions mentioned previously exist TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column 0316011366 Tilt Telescoping Lever To unlock the steering column push the lever downward toward the floor To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the lever upward until fully engaged 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping steering column lever is
219. ary to change the temperature You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391 NOTE e It is not necessary to move the temperature settings The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the Uconnect customer programmable feature Refer to the Uconnect System Settings in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Manual Operation Override The system allows for manual selection of blower speed air distribution mode A C status and recirculation control The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings A C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation NOTE Each of these features operates independently from each other If any fe
220. as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever occurs first 608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Pe troleum Institute API The manu facturer only recommends API Cer tified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating condi
221. at are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph 5 km h to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph 32 km h such as in parking lot situations ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 NOTE In a parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up Fail ure to do so can result in serious injury or death Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Blind Spot Alert Lights Only When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object Howev
222. ate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance 436 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situa tions Operation When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode it will operate automatically shifting between the eight available gears To activate Paddle Shift mode simply tap one of the steering wheel mounted shift paddles while in DRIVE or SPORT mode Tapping to enter Paddle Shift mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear while using to enter Paddle Shift mode will retain the current gear When Paddle Shift mode is active the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster In Paddle Shift mode the transmission will shift up or down when is manually selected by the driver unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen except as described below The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should manually upshift 4 the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated You can start out from a stop
223. ated between the sun Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NOTE Wanna The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the device 034141878 Power Sunroof Switch The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci fications were met 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING WARNING Continued e Never leave children unattended in a vehicle or Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof with access to an unlocked vehicle Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode Occupants particu larly unattended children can become entrapped Press the switch rearward and release it within one half by the power sunroof while operating the power second and the sunroof will open automatically from any sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati
224. ation ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent col lisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro priate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent collisions The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESC system has two available operating modes in 4WD HIGH range and two wheel drive vehicles and one operating mode in 4WD LOW range en STARTING AND OPERATING 477 High Range Four Wheel Drive Models Or Two Wheel Drive Models On This is the normal operating mode for ESC in WD HIGH range and in two wheel drive vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to 4WD HIGH range the ESC system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial
225. ation Child Protection Door Lock Function WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged locked 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE For emergency exit from the rear seats when the Child Protection Door Lock System is engaged manually raise the door lock knob to the unlocked position roll down the window and open the door using the outside door handle KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons NOTE Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information e If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds the vehicle will re lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver s door handle grab the driver s front door
226. ation with throttle or brake application at any time While in driver override the transmission will be in ERS which is a top gear limiter and the vehicle will shift from 1st through whichever gear is displayed Deactivating SSC SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur e Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle or brake application e Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph 32 km h but remains below 40 mph 64 km h e Vehicle is shifted to park Disabling SSC SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the follow ing conditions occur The driver presses the SSC switch e The driveline is shifted out of WD Low Range The parking brake is applied Driver door opens The vehicle is driven faster than 20 mph 32 km h for longer than 70 seconds The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph 64 km h SSC exits immediately Feedback to the driver The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the SSC switch has an LED which offers feedback to the driver about the state SSC is in 490 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated This is the normal operating condition for SSC The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the SSC switch but enable conditions are not met e The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for se
227. ature is controlled manually tempera ture control will continue to operate automatically 392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro sion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 OAT Organic Additive Technology coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 90032 and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes objection
228. atures must be done through the radio Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Driver Information Display DID Messages When the appropriate conditions exist a message will appear in the DID display Refer to Driver Information Display DID in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Operation The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the current position of the vehicle Flashing indicator lamps will show a position which the system is working to achieve When raising if multiple indicator lamps are flashing on the Up button the highest flashing indica tor lamp is the position the system is working to achieve When lowering if multiple indicators are flashing on the Up button the lowest solid indicator lamp is the posi tion the system is working to achieve ee STARTING AND OPERATING 453 Pressing the UP button once will move the suspension one position higher from the current position assuming all conditions are met i e engine running speed below threshold etc The UP button can be pressed multiple times each press will raise the requested level by one position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest position allowed based on current conditions i e vehicle speed etc Pressing the DOWN button once will move the sus pension one position lower from the current level as suming all conditions ar
229. authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis sion damage Fluid And Filter Changes Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Routine fluid and filter changes are not required How ever change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes Ij contaminated with water etc or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason 644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built i
230. ave a convex passenger side mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions e Full forward position Full rearward position Normal position Power Folding Outside Mirrors If Equipped If equipped with power folding mirrors they can be electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive position The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L left and R right Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in press the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to the normal driving position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled Power Mirrors a potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors back to the home position If the mirror does not electrically fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot area which can cause excessive drag The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but lt gt tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a 3 o mirror press the mirror select button for the mirror that you want to adjust Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move The power mirror switch is located on the driver s side door trim panel 0314040201 Power Foldin
231. avel stop on one side and repeat this procedure for the opposite side 3 Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment door toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the glove compartment door from its hinges NOTE When disengaging the glove compartment door from its hinges there will be some resistance 0726033348 4 With the glove compartment door loose remove the glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compart 1 Glove Compartment Travel Stops ment door and lifting the clip out of glove compart 2 Glove Compartment Tension Tether ment door 3 Glove Compartment Door Glove Compartment 620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE t 0726033349 Right Side Of Glove Compartment 1 Glove Compartment Tension Tether 2 Glove Compartment Door 5 Remove the filter cover by disengaging the retaining tab and mid way snap that secures the filter cover to the HVAC housing Disengage the mid way snap by pulling the door outward Unhinge the filter cover on the right side to fully remove the cover 9 A C Air Filter Cover 1 Retaining Tab 2 Mid Way Snap 3 Filter Cover Hinge ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621 6 Remove the A C air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing 7 Install the A C air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the retai
232. ay have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpect edly The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene Towing A Trailer Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel or a vehicle merging in from a side lane There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly 032400170 Offset Driving Condition Example en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 Turns And Bends When driving on a curve with ACC engaged the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons with no target vehicle detected Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original Set Speed This is a part of normal ACC system functionality NOTE On tight turns ACC performance may be limited 032400171 Turn Or Bend Example 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sg Using ACC On Hills Lane Changing When driving on hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic lane in which you are traveling In the illustration shown conditions and the steepness of the hills ACC perfor ACC has not yet detected the vehicle c
233. b with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 NOTE Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit ter buttons for all RKE transmitters 0202042089 Keyless Enter N Go Fob To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Flash Lamps With Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understan
234. be met until the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met before press ing the NEUTRAL N button or are no longer met during the shift the NEUTRAL N indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL N button is released The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing A flashing NEUTRAL N position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 569 B IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 22r 569 E WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS 2 ee eee eee ne 570 Torque Specifications ss srst k iie os a 570 E JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 572 Jack Location esu consed sce E Res 573 O Spare Tire Stowage cse es 573 Preparations For Jacking 574 Jacking Instructions Road Tire Installation E JUMP STARTING Jump Starting Procedure Preparations For Jump Start E FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE E EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED 589 ll MANUAL PARK RELEASE 568 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EBENEN E TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
235. ble Menu Items Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until the desired Selectable Menu icon title is highlighted in the DID 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Speedometer MPH To km h Push and release the LEFT or RIGHT arrow Push and release the Le or a ar halton until the MPH to km h icon is highlighted in the button to toggle between the Speedometer dis lay iype nalor or Dipl DID Push and release the OK button to change pay P 8 51ta the display between MPH or km h Analog Speedometer Vehicle Info Customer Information Features hd SUD Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Vehicle Info icon title is high Digital lighted in the DID Push and release the RIGHT Speedometer arrow button and Coolant Temp will be dis played Push and release the LEFT or RIGHT arrow en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 button to scroll through the information submenus and Terrain If Equipped push and release the OK button to select or reset the following resettable submenus Push and release the UP or DOWN Tire Pressure arrow button until the Terrain display AYA icon title is highlighted in the DID TERR A IN Push and release the RIGHT or LEFT Oil Temperature arrow button to display the Selec Terrain Air Suspension Drivetrain and Wheel Articulation Transmission Temperature Oil Pressure Oil Life Driver Assist If Equipped Battery Voltage button until the Driver Assist display icon titl
236. bol on the sill molding Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579 060637590 T 060641477 mm Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding Rear Jacking Location 6 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum sta bility 580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 7 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 8 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts 060633619 CAUTION Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem Mounting Spare Tire WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581 9 10 TE 12 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter clockwise and remove the jack and wheel blocks Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on
237. button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 e Navigation Turn By Turn Displayed In Cluster If Equipped When this feature is selected To make your selection press the Navigation Turn By Turn Displayed In Clus ter button on the touchscreen until a check mark ap pears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Voice After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings To change the Voice Response Length press the Brief or Detailed button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Show Command List When in this display you may choose to Always With Help or Never display the Teleprompter with possible options while in a voice session To change the Show Command List settings press the Always With Help or Never button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee Clock After pressi
238. can be carried in the vehicle 2 Total weight your vehicle can carry 3 Tire size designed for your vehicle 4 Cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual ee STARTING AND OPERATING 501 NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWKRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and T ine th i loadi iti f E o determine the maximum loading conditions of your passengers that will be riding in your vehicle vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg The combin
239. ccupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 tbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING 503 AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 325 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 504 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure e Safety and Vehicle Stability Economy Tread Wear e Ride Comfort Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in overheating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Overinflated or under inflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Continued ee START
240. ce must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the 684 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE MMM facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con cern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center e Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 877 426 5337 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 685 In Mexico Contact Av Prolongacion
241. ce within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by pushing the LIFTGATE button located on the front overhead console or closed by pushing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim panel near the liftgate opening Pushing the LIFTGATE button located on left rear trim panel once will close the liftgate only this button cannot be used to open the liftgate When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is pushed two times the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect settings and the liftgate chime will be audible For further infor mation refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE NOTE e In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate an e The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the lift gate trim panel e If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power liftgate functionality WARNING During power operation personal injury or cargo damage may occur Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
242. chart MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651 LZ 25 072874390 a 1 Power Distribution Center 652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F03 60 Amp Yellow Radiator Fan F05 40 Amp Green Compressor for Air Suspension If Equipped F06 40 Amp Green Anti lock Brakes Electronic Stability Control Pump F07 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid F08 20 Amp Blue Emission Sensors Diesel engine only F09 30 Amp Pink Diesel Fuel Heater Diesel engine only F10 40 Amp Green Body Controller Exterior Lighting 2 F11 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Electric Brake If Equipped F12 40 Amp Green Body Controller 3 Power Locks F13 40 Amp Green Blower Motor Front F14 40 Amp Green Body Controller 4 Interior Lights 2 F17 30 Amp Pink Headlamp Washer If Equipped F19 20 Amp Blue Headrest Solenoid If Equipped F20 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door Module F22 20 Amp Blue Engine Control Module ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F23 30 Amp Pink Interior Lights 1 F24 30 Amp Pink Driver Door Module F25 30 Amp Pink Front Wipers F26 30 Amp Pink Anti lock Brakes Stability Control Module Valves F28 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Backup Lights If Equipped F29 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Parking Lights If Equipped F30 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Receptacle
243. chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration Continued shudder Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty CAUTION If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your autho rized dealer immediately Severe transmission dam age may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the transmis sion has no dipstick Your
244. cial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649 When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly 650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING dads A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and WARNING leave you with no prote
245. circulation When outside air contains smoke odors or 2450 high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected Press the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The recirculation feature may be unavailable button on the touchscreen greyed out if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield On systems with Manual Climate Controls the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Automatic Temperature Control ATC Automatic Operation 1 Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the AUTO button on the touchscreen 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas senger temperature buttons on the faceplate or but tons on the touchscreen Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automati cally maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necess
246. cle parking brake is applied The braking temperature exceeds normal range over heated The shift lever gear selector is removed from the Drive position To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if The Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button is pressed The ignition is turned off You engage Four Wheel Drive Low The Adaptive Cruise Control ACC On Off button is pressed FORWARD COLLISION WARNING FCW WITH MITIGATION IF EQUIPPED Forward Collision Warning FCW With Mitigation Operation The Forward Collision Warning FCW system with mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings visual warnings within the DID and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal collision The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react avoid or mitigate the potential collision ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 NOTE FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller EBC to calculate the probability of a forward collision When the system determines that a forward collision is probable the driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings and may provide a b
247. ction Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they e When replacing a blown fuse always use an appro priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury fire and or property damage Before replacing a fuse make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and or disengaged e If the replaced fuse blows again contact an autho rized dealer have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web bing etc Continued WARNING Continued e If a general protection fuse for safety systems air bag system braking system power unit systems engine system gearbox system or steering system blows contact an authorized dealer Power Distribution Center The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains car tridge fuses micro fuses relays and circuit breakers A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following
248. curity alarms are quite different Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm 1 Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the OFF position refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open e Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information e Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RK
249. cy braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver When the throttle is released very quickly Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake pressure This brake pressure will not be noticed by the driver The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes Rain Brake Support If Equipped Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors It only functions when the windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode it does not function in the intermittent mode When Rain Brake Support is active there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required 482 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in Four Wheel Drive Models With MP3023 4WD Low Range HDC maintains vehicle speed while Two Speed Transfer Case Only descending hills during various driving situations HDC controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes HDC has three states 1 Off feature is not enabled and will not activate 2 Enabled feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application 3 Active feature is enabled and actively controlling v
250. d The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is dis played in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 Speed Warning If Equipped title is highlighted in the DID Push and release OK to enter speed warning Use UP or DOWN arrow to select a desired speed then push and release OK to set the speed The Manual Speed Assist MSA Speed Warning telltale will display in the DID and a chime will sound with a pop up warning message when the set speed is exceeded Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Speed Warning Menu icon Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items Current Gear e On e Off 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mMm Upper Left Upper Right None None e Compass Compass default setting Outside Temp default setting Outside Temp Time Time e Range To Empty RTE Range To Empty RTE Fuel Economy Average Fuel Economy Average Fuel Economy Current Fuel Economy Current e Trip A e Trip A e Trip B e Trip B E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 Restore To Defaults Restores All Settings To Default Settings e Cancel e Okay Safety Assistance Uconnect SETTINGS The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and change the custo
251. d Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to fric tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners ca
252. d before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death LIGHTS Headlight S witch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the Safety Latch Location instrument panel next to the steering wheel The head CAUTION light switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instrument panel lights cargo lights and To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to fog lights if equipped 031373456 close it Use a firm downward push at the front center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog light if equipped lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore differ ent lens cleaning procedures must be followed EN To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing 031409529 Headlight Switch CAUTION To turn on the headlights rotate the headlight O switch clockwise When the headlight switch is Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents on the parking lights taillights license
253. d like to hear Sub scription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required Push the VR button vr After the beep say e Tune to ninety five point five FM e Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1 TIP At any time if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command press the VR button SvRand say Help The system will provide you with a list of commands 10 10 I 89 9 101 9 94 7 1033 All FM 1019 AM SXM Tune Info Audio 4 Uconnect 5 0 Radio 400 76 4 37 7 8 9 10 11 12 80s on 8 90s on9 Booze RockBar xL Sha BPM Traffic Weather 135 CHI DET Chicago Weather Detroit next browse replay Media Controls Climate Nav Phone Uconnect 8 4A 8 4AN Radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mMm Media Uconnect offers connections via USB SD Bluetooth and auxiliary ports If Equipped Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod devices Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles Push the VR button vr After the beep say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist Change source to Bluetooth e Change source to iPod e Change source to USB Play artist Beethoven Play album Greatest Hits Play song Moonlight Sonata Play genre Classical UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401 TIP Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod
254. d should remain free from any obstructions Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs In order for the SABICS to work as intended do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 The SABICs and SABs Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC de termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate based on the severity and type of collision Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes Occupants including children who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed Occupants including children should never lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the Side Air Bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Seat belts and child restraints where appropriate are necessary for your protection in all collisions They also hel
255. d will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped AC MAX A C Uconnect 8 4A 8 4AN Climate EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405 Navigation 8 4A 8 4AN TIP To start a POI search push the VR button Q VR The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time After the beep say Find nearest coffee shop and become more productive when you know exactly how to get to where you want to go Navigation is optional on the Uconnect 8 4A system See your dealer to activate navigation at any time 1 To enter a destination push the VR button Ave After the beep say p 4 Where To View Map Information Emergency For the 8 4A Uconnect System say Enter state For the 8 4AN Uconnect System say Navigate to 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills Michigan Settings 2 Then follow the system prompts AES eA Radio Media Controls Climate Nav Uconnect 8 4A 8 4AN Navigation 406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Uconnect Access 8 4A 8 4AN An included trial and or subscription is required to take advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next section of this guide To register with Uconnect Access press the Apps button on the 8 4 inch touchscreen to get started Detailed registration instructions can be found on the next page Uconnect9 Access is available only on equipped ve hicles purchased within the continental United States and
256. de Lowers the vehicle approximately 1 6 in 40 mm This position lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo To enter Entry Exit Mode push the Down button once from NRH while the vehicle speed is below 25 mph 40 km h Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph 24 km h the vehicle height will begin to lower If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph 24 km h and 25 mph 40 km h for greater than 60 seconds or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph 40 km h the Entry Exit Mode change will be can celled To exit Entry Exit Mode press the Up button once while in Entry Exit Mode or drive the vehicle over 15 mph 24 km h 450 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN NOTE Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry Exit Mode can be enabled through the Uconnect Touch Screen Radio If this feature is enabled the vehicle will only lower if the shift lever is in PARK the terrain switch is in AUTO the transfer case is in AUTO and the vehicle level should be either in Normal or Aero Mode The Vehicle will not automatically lower if the air suspension level is in Off Rd 2 or Off Rd 1 If the vehicle is equipped with Intrusion Theft Module ITM the lowering will be suppressed when the ignition is switched Off and the Door is Open to prevent setting the alarm Off The Selec Terrain switch will automatically change the vehicle to the pr
257. de the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage and move it up or down to the position that serves you best 9 Adjustable Anchorage ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 As a guide if you are shorter than average you will Seat Belt Extender The Seat Belt Extender should be used prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position only if the existing seat belt is not long enough When the and if you are taller than average you will prefer the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position After you pant it must be removed release the anchorage button try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position WARNING NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is e ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows required in order to properly fit the original seat the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward belt system DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender position without pushing or squeezing the release but if when worn the distance between the front edge ton
258. der inflated nspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has notbeen driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter ee STARTING AND OPERATING 507 WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40
259. ding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Headlight Illumination On Approach This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect amp To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information This feature allows the Remote Keyless Entry REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still x2 maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start e Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE trans mitter may reduce this range ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Sound Horn With Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off
260. distance is detected Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead Always be aware which mode is selected To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET or SET button and release Release the accel erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE CON TROL SET TO MPH KM will appear indicating what speed was set This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Con trol is set you can increase speed by pressing the SET button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of U S mph or Metric km h units U S Speed mph e Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID display ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VE
261. dows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 Ignition Off Operation NOTE The power sunroof switch can remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the vehicles ignition is cycled to the Off position Opening either front door will cancel this feature This feature is programmable using the Uconnect Sys tem Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 034433149 COMMANDVIEW 6 SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE IF EQUIPPED CommandView Sunroof And Power Shade Switches The Command View sunroof switch is located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console The power shade switch is located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM WARNING WARNING Continued e Never leave children unattended in a vehicle or Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof with access to an unlocked vehicle Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode Occupants particu
262. driven Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or higher and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main tenance schedule is highly recommended WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline en STARTING AND OPERATING 515 Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicator Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart ex ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace
263. e guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 551 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Safety chains must always be used between your e Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to vehicle and the trailer such that the following four the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the ratings are not exceeded chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough 1 GVWR slack for turning corners e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a 2 GTW grade When parking apply the parking brake on 3 GAWR the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK For four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL Always lized block or chock the trailer wheels e GCWR must not be exceeded 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti Continued 552 STARTING AND
264. e zm is highlighted in the DID For further informa tion refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Pi Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee Fuel Economy W e Range e Current MPG or L 100 km e Average MPG or L 100 km Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Fuel Economy Menu icon title is highlighted Push and hold the OK button to reset feature Trip uar Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trip icon title is highlighted in the DID then toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B The Trip A and Trip B information will display the following Distance mi Average Fuel Economy Elapsed Time Hold the OK button to reset all the information Audio dd Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Audio Menu icon title is high lighted in the DID Stored Messages Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Messages Menu icon title is highlighted in the DID This feature shows the number of stored warning messages Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are Screen Setup Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow ceo button until the Screen Setup Menu icon title is highlighted in the DID Push and release the OK button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts on the screen as neede
265. e proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly Refer to Child Restraints should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older chil dren who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 6 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 7 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate 12 years or younger including a child in a rear 8 Do not lean against the door or window If your facing child restraint vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the e Only use rear facing child restraint in a vehicle side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space with a rear seat between you and the door and you could be injured Seat Belt Systems 9 If the air bag system in this vehicle ne
266. e Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended CAUTION CAUTION Continued need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an au thorized dealer as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency the cooling system will Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8 amp 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of you
267. e RKE transmitter Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will be displayed in the Driver Information Display DID Driver One Memory Position Recall To recall the memory settings for driver one using the memory switch press MEMORY button number 1 on the memory switch To recall the memory settings for driver one using the RKE transmitter press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Driver Two Memory Position Recall e To recall the memory setting for driver two using the memory switch press MEMORY button number 2 on the memory switch To recall the memory settings for driver two using the RKE transmitter press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons during a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat steering column if equipped and pedals if equipped stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected Easy Entry Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the vehicles ig
268. e Reset Procedure 1 Without pushing the brake pedal push and release the ENGINE START STOP button and place the ignition to the ON RUN position do not start the engine Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds Without pushing the brake pedal push and release the ENGINE START STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure DID Messages e Front Seatbelts Unbuckled e Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled Service Airbag System Traction Control Off Washer Fluid Low Oil Pressure Low Oil Change Due Fuel Low Service Antilock Brake System Service Electronic Throttle Control Service Power Steering Cruise Off Cruise Ready ACC Override ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 Cruise Set To XXX MPH e Right Turn Signal Light Out e Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire s Inflate Tire to e Left Turn Signal Light Out d IGN OR ACC Vehicle Not in Park IGN OR ACC KEYLESS GO e Service Tire Pressure System e Speed Warning Set e Speed Warnung Exceeded e Key in Ignition Lights On e Parking Brake Engaged Brake Fluid Low Remote Start Active Key to Run e Remote Start Active Push Start Button e Service Electronic Braking System Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e Eng
269. e Uconnect system allows you to access program mable features that may be equipped such as Display Voice Clock Safety amp Driving Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Auto On Comfort Engine Off Options Suspen sion Audio Phone Bluetooth SiriusXM Setup Restore Settings Clear Personal Data and System Information NOTE Only one category may be selected at a time To adjust the setting of a programmable feature press the desired setting option Once in the desired setting option press and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the list of available settings Display After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Display Mode When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status select from Day Night or Auto until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been se lected Then press the arrow back button on the touch screen en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 NOTE When Day or Night is select
270. e blades cannot return to the park position damage to the wiper motor may occur Intermittent Wiper System Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable delay between cycles desirable At driving speeds above 10 mph 16 km h the delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles first detent to a cycle every one second fourth detent 031563345 Windshield Wiper Operation mnmmmm X UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Windshield Washer Operation To use the washer push on the end of the lever toward the steering wheel and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the end of the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected 031563345 Intermittent Wiper Operation NOTE If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ge WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use
271. e control button through the climate screen or the controls screen e Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn the heating element ON e Press the heated steering wheel button amp a second time to turn the heating element OFF NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start WARNING Continued On models that are equipped with remote start the e Do not place anything on the steering wheel that heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on insulates against heat such as a blanket or steering during a remote start through the Uconnect system wheel covers of any type and material This may Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your cause the steering wheel heater to overheat Instrument Panel for further information ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED WARNING When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes 40 km h spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the tion or other physical conditions must exercise right side of the steering wheel care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially i
272. e dealer for tire repairs and additional information Damaged Run Flat tires or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description Load Index and Speed Symbol Tire Types All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons spring summer fall and winter Traction levels may vary be tween different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires be aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold driving conditions Install winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40 F 5 C or if roads are covered with ice or snow For more informa tion contact an authorized dealer Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle WARNING Do not use summer tires in snow ice conditions You could lose
273. e height change will be paused until the vehicle speed either goes below 15 mph 24 km h and the height change continues to Entry Exit Mode or exceeds 25 mph 40 km h and the vehicle height will return to NRH Entry Exit Mode may be selected while the vehicle is not moving provided that the engine is still running and all doors remain closed Transport Mode No indicator lamps will be illumi nated Customer driving will disable Transport Mode Tire Jack Mode indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be illumi nated Customer driving will disable Tire Jack Mode Wheel Alignment Mode indicator lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated Customer driving will disable Wheel Alignment Mode ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVI
274. e is driven greater than 20 mph 32 km h for greater than 70 seconds The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph 64 km h HDC exits immediately The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when HDC deactivates due to excess speed 486 STARTING AND OPERATING e The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC Selec Speed Control SSC If Equipped deactivates due to overheated brakes The flashing will Four Wheel Drive Models With MP3023 stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have Two Speed Transfer Case Only cooled sufficiently WARNING HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control ling vehicle speed when descending hills The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed 0518005852 Selec Speed Control Switch ee STARTING AND OPERATING 487 SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD Low Range only SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively controlling engine torque and brakes SSC has three states 1 Off feature is not enabled and will not activate 2 Enabled feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application 3 Active feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed Enabling SSC SSC is enabled by pressing the SSC switch but the following conditions must also be met to enable S
275. e met i e engine running doors closed speed below threshold etc The DOWN button can be pressed multiple times Each press will lower the requested level by one position down to a minimum of Park Mode or the lowest position allowed based on current conditions i e vehicle speed etc Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle speed and the current vehicle height The indicator lamps and DID messages will operate the same for automatic changes and user requested changes e Off Road 2 OR2 Indicator lamps 4 5 and 6 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2 Off Road 1 OR1 Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in ORI Normal Ride Height NRH Indicator lamp 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in this position Entry Exit Mode Indicator lamp 3 will be illumi nated when the vehicle is in Entry Exit Mode If Entry Exit Mode is requested while vehicle speed is between 15 mph 24 km h and 25 mph 40 km h indicator lamp 4 will remain on solid and indicator lamp 3 will flash as the system waits for the vehicle to reduce speed If vehicle speed is reduced to and kept 454 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN e below 15 mph 24 km h indicator lamp 4 will turn off and indicator lamp 3 will flash until Entry Exit Mode is achieved at which point indicator lamp 3 will go solid If during the height change to Entry Exit Mode the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h th
276. e removed in the center seating position only Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103 Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat 5 To lock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any webbing If the retractor is not lock
277. e the ignition is in ACC or ON RUN and the driver s door is open the doors will not lock 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee If a rear door is locked it cannot be opened from inside the vehicle without first unlocking the door The door may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or through the Uconnect Settings in your radio Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature If Equipped If Auto Unlock is enabled this feature will unlock all the doors when any door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in PARK Refer to UconnectQ Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 021862579 021806189 i Child Protection Door Lock Loc
278. e vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle 432 STARTING AND OPERATING EE CAUTION DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must start the engine and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi tion When shifting into PARK press the lock button on the shift lever and push the lever all the way forward until it stops When released the lever will return to the center position e With brake pedal released look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position P REVERSE R This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL N
279. e window is fully open window before closing Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up There is no anti pinch protection when the window en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Window Lockout Button Wind Buffeting The Window Lockout button on the driver s door allows Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of you to disable the window controls on the rear doors To pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the disable the window controls on the rear doors push the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the Window Lockout button To enable the window controls windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain push the Window Lockout button again open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting Window Lockout Button 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LIFTGATE To Unlock Enter The Liftgate The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the liftgate push the electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Pr
280. early at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver Bach time you give a Voice Command you must first push either the VR or Phone button wait until after the beep then say your Voice Command You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category 0415029586 Uconnect amp Voice Command 1 Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call Send Or Receive A Text 2 For all radios Push To Begin Radio or Media functions For 8 4A 8 4AN only Push to begin Navigation Apps And Climate Functions 3 Push To End Call UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397 Basic Voice Commands The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system Push the VR button vr After the beep say e Cancel to stop a current voice session Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands e Repeat to listen to the system prompts again 398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MMM Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system s status Cues appear on the touch screen We Listening Help Cancel A Uconnect 8 4A 8 4AN Uconnect 5 0 E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399 Radio Use your voice to quickly get to the AM FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you woul
281. eased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle has a recommended cold parked for more than three hours tire placard pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 521 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e The TPMS has been optimized for the original After inspecting or adjusting the tire pner equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and always reinstall the valve stem cap This will warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesi
282. eat cushion will move in seat belt the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Continued 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Continued e Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise and lower the position of the support 030909539 Power Lumbar Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Manual Front Seats Forward Rearward While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar located under Adjustment the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward Some models may be equipped with a manual front Release the bar once you have reached the desired passenger seat The seat can be adjusted
283. eature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate ee STARTING AND OPERATING 469 NOTE WARNING e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Th
284. ecured by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis sion will not shift out of PARK such as a dead battery a Manual Park Release is available Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release 1 Firmly apply the parking brake 2 Open the center console and locate the Manual Park Release cover remove it by snapping the cover away from the console hinges WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 591 y 0605001183 0605001179 Manual Park Release Cover Release Latch 3 Using a screwdriver or similar tool push the metal 4 While the metal latch is in the open position simulta latch in towards the tether strap neously pull upwards on the tether strap until the lever clicks and latches in the released position The transmission is now out of PARK and the vehicle can be moved 5902 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE 0605001180 Released Position CAUTION Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is activated may damage the Manual Park Release mechanism the transmission and or the armrest NOTE To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintention ally firmly apply the parking brake To Disengage the Manual Park Release Lever 1 To disengage the Manual Park Release apply tension upward while pushi
285. ed repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor 104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN 9 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt path It ENN GUT should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any approved for that seating position located behind the direction top of the vehicle seat See the section Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren LATCH Restraint System for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the seat belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage At Do not attach a tether strap for a rear facing car seat to Ww Ww 0226047162 any location in front of the car seat including the seat frame or a tether anchorage Only attach the tether strap of a rear facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE ST
286. ed as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION Do not make modifications or alterations to the immobilizer system Modifications or alterations to the immobilization system may result in a loss of security protection The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not com patible with some aftermarket remote starting sys tems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 This procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been p
287. ed by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Air Bag Warning Light Af Steering Wheel and Column e nstrument Panel Knee Impact Bolsters Advanced Front Air Bags Supplemental Side Air Bags Supplemental Knee Air Bags e Front and Side Impact Sensors 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE e Seat Belt Pretenioners e Seat Belt Buckle Switch e Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations the air bag COVEIS 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 Passenger Knee Impact Bolster 3 Driver Knee Impact Bolster Supplemental Knee Air Bag 022674387 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 WARNING Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms
288. ed for the Display Mode the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on Display Brightness With Headlights ON When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights on Adjust the brightness with the and setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the and buttons on the touchscreen Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen NOTE To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights ON setting the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions Display Brightness With Headlights OFF When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the and buttons on the touchscreen Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen NOTE To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights OFF setting the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions e Set Theme This feature will allow you to choose a background theme for the display screen The theme will change the background color highlight color and button color of the display screen 338 UND
289. ed range When the brakes are overheated When the driver door is open When the driver seat belt is unbuckled To Activate Deactivate Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON OFF button The ACC menu in the DID displays ACC Ready ACC Ready Adaptive Cruise Control Ready 0323001278 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee To turn the system OFF push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON OFF button again At this time the system will turn off and the DID will display Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Off Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Off 0323001263 Adaptive Cruise Control Off WARNING Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the system off when you are not using it To Set A Desired ACC Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the SET button or the SET button and release The DID will display the set speed If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph 32 km h the Set Speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph 32 km h If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h the Set Speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 NOTE ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle i
290. ed weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 Ibs 68 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg and 1400 lbs 635 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg 650 lbs 295 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 502 STARTING AND OPERATING M 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle The follow ing table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and num ber and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 892 kg TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS minus minus Combined Occupant s weight O
291. eds to be Y modified to accommodate a disabled person contact Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided On short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver under If You Need Consumer Assistance and could cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert amp BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front passenger if equipped with out board front passenger BeltAlert to buckle their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 MPH 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will contin
292. ee 20 Tamper Aler sri xL YES LEVY 22 Alarm Pame 22a cR REO TROC A Rum 25 Alarm Security Alarm lese ess 19 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 9 en INDEX 693 Antifreeze Engine Coolant issus 633 Disposal each yard ER er a S Rade ew 4 636 Anti Lock Warning Light 0 290 Appearance Care iu su ve ae eio a 644 Assist Ell Static doe EUER dod a 479 Auto Down Power Windows sess 42 Automatic Door Locks 2 0 0 0 000000000 34 Automatic Headlights lille 168 Automatic High Beams 2005 169 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 382 Automatic Transmission liess 428 Adding Fluid 2 0 2 cs4 2 6 seca se 643 Fluid and Filter Changes 6 643 Fluid Change s ais gee oh es ed ga ee de 643 Fluid Level Check ie Rb RR 642 Fluid Type ii ri a aes 642 Gear Ranges iaces ex xn o GRO ee 430 Special Additives ced seems ce e Rd 642 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 263 Auxiliary Power Outlet arase ser enea 263 Axle Fluid MER 671 Battery PDT 615 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 26 Belts oea beraa pura RR awa We eS Gre ae 110 Blind Spot Monitoring llle 134 Body Mechanism Lubrication 621 B Pillar Locations see mere ees 499 Brake Assist System o ouo rimaa enp eea o eaa 474 Brake Control System Electronic 471 Brake Fluid sor su RR
293. ee eee 689 Radial ege sua baeru 3 cease da pe eR 24 4 507 Replacements isla sera sega s 515 ROtAHON esa 518 Safety ae cpe ne Seed CS pedo ES eR ead 492 DIZ S per Taea Gs Hee s meth AES Arete EE ERE 493 SNOW Tires 4 4e ede ema e ede ih Pale e 509 Spare r a s d ciere des e ERROR RD d eae deas 573 SPINNING uu irese ie mE e ds antep go bed 513 Trailer Towing i pockets ehe eser cats e na 552 Tread Wear Indicators llle 513 Tire Safety Information llle 492 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 548 Tow Hooks Emergency llle 589 TOWING 205 2 Sats hie eee De enda aC n E at auis 541 Disabled Vehicle 0 0 0 00 eee ee 593 Ei EEEE TETEE STEET EEEE EET esate 546 Recreational 1 2 ee eee eee 557 Weight cuero erg eee dea 546 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome 557 Traction Control i4 22s sse b hes RES 473 Trailer Sway Control TSC 0 0 478 Trailer TOWING 3a case iR e ce Marae tone ans 541 Cooling System Tips ici eae es er ees 556 Elitchies Sauce Pug ET te Bes 545 Minimum Requirements sss 550 Trailer and Tongue Weight 548 Wiring sacs dure REPERTA EE SR as 553 Trailer Towing Guide s sesi maie aia a padise 546 Trailer Weight exei sem bere E dimas ig 546 Transfer Case i ds eso dew a ela Rw ees ROAD e deu 641 Fluid 222r REOR REPE RE oed 671 Maintenance 2v bnbel Be939 Ry ReS a 641 Transmission
294. ees LN Gee iS 570 Maintenance Free Battery 0 0 615 Maintenance Procedures 00000 eee 606 Maintenance Schedule 00 0000 000s 674 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 291 Manual Service 0 0 0 ees 688 Memory Feature Memory Seat 160 Memory Seat i comenssa tama nied Eee dogs 160 Memory Seats and Radio 0 160 Methatiol 25 14 2294944444343 Poa Ed S 529 MITOS e pams 6 oa eee ESR RA GE UR a 123 Electric Powered llle 131 Electric Remote 0 0 131 Exterior Folding 00 0000 130 Heated a as ee akon cava eee nek a eae 132 O tside ii suce p REA ae CREE RE ds 130 Rearview eel 123 Manity dos ce nnan wa oe esta ea does TES 133 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 9 Monitor Tire Pressure System 519 MOPAR Parts lee 605 MTBE ETBE en INDEX 703 Multi Function Control Lever 00005 166 New Vehicle Break In Period 108 Occupant Restraints 6 6 6 eee ees 50 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 0 527 Odometer 2a oes dero ko RR ds 297 TAD Anas eo dog Rte a SU a a Matis adalat d 297 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 455 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 455 Oil ENGINES s eee em eem e dings oe any 303 Capacity a5 cine hr ed AENEA a EEG ear d 668 Change Intervals asrasa aueia eae ee 607 Dipstick sr ssa ee
295. ees e tsiera i 607 Disposal sce xbv em eR me bes qms 610 Fillet sos bes ea ee A A ao a Riego 610 Filter Disposal sess remnants t eee 610 Identification Logo eek eem 608 Materials Added to 00 0000 e eee 610 Recommendation ss isesi ssaa asit sei eae 608 Synth etie iiu i aa pakhi kas E rae dU dcs caa 609 VISCOSILY aee x es AG PEOR e ia Gee seiad 608 Oil Filter Selection llle 610 Onboard Diagnostic System esc ecca domari es 603 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 246 Operating Precautions es ccecce csere miscaia ss 603 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 6 Outside Rearview Mirrors 00 130 Overhead Console llle 244 Overheating Engine llle 293 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 6 Paint Cate ce crasta ke a c acer acere 644 Panic Alarmi dssdo eae yer har eta eae nae 25 Parking Brakes 5a LE Eee EU Sa 468 ParkSense System Rear llle 223 Passing Light Passive Entry l etSs xac eek Be Pte Aen ea ae 108 Placard Tire and Loading Information 500 Power loci TED A71 Distribution Center Fuses 651 Door Locks rd eter eerte 33 Inverter ii oder ak oet ghee eda s 268 Litt Gates ox acid tA a eae ah aie Seam ad xw 47 Mirrors iub Gs fats Daten ae Hoe ea eas 131 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 263 ln C m 144 DICCHING osi Poe eee OC Y nera b PE 464 Surirool vas ele ck og equi
296. eet bath oa ea oa eas 15 Ignition Or Accessory On Message 16 E SENTRY KEY 0 0 0 nnn 17 Replacement Keys 000005 18 Customer Key Programming 19 General Information 004 19 ll VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED osregi aaneren Meda wee Rs 19 Rearming The System 20 20 To Arm The System sce tex ees 20 To Disarm The System llle ss 21 Tamper Alert adore REA ee 22 E ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED 22 E REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE 4 22 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 23 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 25 O Using The Panic Alarm 25 Programming Additional Transmitters 26 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Transmitter Battery Replacement 26 BM LIFTGATE orco y Rr emm 46 General Information 0 27 Power Liftgate If Equipped 47 ll REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM ll OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 50 SOU eRe keh oe eke SEG Pee RR ne Important Safety Precautions 50 OY LO ee tqq ee sapere a Seat Belt Systems reticere ditis 51 E DOOR LOCKS 2i4 6 2 neers 4 189 54 S83 31 Supplemental Restraint System SRS 67 ROG Pas Leos ite vie
297. ehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition ram malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or System can result in civil penalties being assessed against some light smoke your engine may be out of tune You or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser vice Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued 532 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fu
298. ehicle speed 0582003297 Hill Descent Control Switch ee STARTING AND OPERATING 483 Enabling HDC e P No set speed HDC may be enabled but will not HDC is enabled by pressing the HDC switch but the activate following conditions must also be met to enable HDC e R 0 6 mph 1 km h e Driveline is in 4WD Low Range e N 12 mph 2 km h e Vehicle speed is below 5mph 8 km h e 1st 0 6 mph 1 km h e Parking brake is released e 2nd 12 mph 2 km h e Driver door is closed e 3rd 1 8 mph 3 km h Activating HDC e 4th 2 5 mph 4 km h Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if 4 5th 3 1 mph 5 km h driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude greater than approximately 8 The set speed for HDC is 6th 3 7 mph 6 km h selectable by the driver and can be adjusted by using the 7th 43 mph 7 km h paddle shifter The following summarizes the HDC set speeds e 8th 5 0 mph 8 km h 484 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN NOTE e During HDC the paddle shifter input is used for HDC target speed selection and will put the transmis sion into ERS but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission unless in Driver Override During HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver selected set speed and corresponding driving condi tions HDC performance is influenced by the Terrain Select mode This difference may be notable to the driver and may be perceived as a varying level
299. elative to the vehicle 0328050370 en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 If an obstacle is detected in the left and or right rear region the display will show a single arc in the left and or right rear region and the system will produce a tone As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1 2 second tone to slow to fast to continuous qu a SZ Single 1 2 Second Tone 0328050371 lh Ww Slow Tone 0328050372 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM 0328050373 0328050374 Fast Tone Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert opera tion when the system is detecting an obstacle en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 WARNING ALERTS Rear Distance Greater than 79 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 12 in 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone Arc None 4th Solid 3rd 2nd 1st Solid Flashing Flashing Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes Reduced NOTE ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone Adjustable Chime Volume Settings Rear chime volume settings can be selected fr
300. en the air conditioning system is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin For improved fuel economy press the A C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings Also make sure to select only Panel Bi Level or Floor modes NOTE For Manual Climate Controls if the system is in Mix Floor or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser lo cated in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance MAX A C MAX A C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor mance Press and release to toggle between MAX A C and the prior settings The button on the touchscreen illuminates when MAX A C is ON In MAX A C the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A C operation to switch to the prior settings and the MAX A C indicator will turn off 390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MMM Re
301. enever the ACC system applies the brakes A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance If this occurs a visual alert BRAKE will flash in the DID and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity BRAKE 0323001258 Brake Alert NOTE The Brake Screen in the DID is a warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying the brakes autonomously ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 Overtake Aid When driving with ACC engaged and following a target vehicle the system will provide an additional accelera tion to assist in passing vehicles in front This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal In locations with left hand drive traffic Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left hand side of the Target vehicles When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic the ACC system will automatically detect traffic direction In this condition Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the right side of the Target vehicle This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right turn signal In this condition the ACC system will no longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it determines that
302. ens 82 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 0 0 000 0 eee eee 109 Exhaust System 52224994 Pehedidad ek gehe 109 Exteri r Lights cs ioca opes a RR OS env hans 112 Filters AupCleanef 24 04 120244464 4 0225 A488 Od 611 Air Conditioning 0 000000 393 Engine Oil cies es e PONG GE Ve a qid 610 Engine Oil Disposal 000 610 Flashers 5 a3 he ea aoe oo Ee ed S 569 Hazard Warning 00 est akaai 569 Turm Signals iie WA Aah enr BE eee ds 112 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Crilising Range e RR cys 535 Engine Oil os ove ceed e e eas 534 Fuel Requirements 532 Maintenarite sis used ku RERO XR URP egg Replacement Parts 698 INDEX EE Starih dui acce ied x emis a iod eU Et d 535 Flooded Engine Starting 004 422 Fluid Brake a 23 08 a Sh ahd ddl ene aad 671 Fluid Capacities ecetes chr anak ee C iod 668 Floid Leaks 404 4546 Wea ete eee ee 113 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission Ls 643 Brake ssa 6083 8 Sao grace Eae d eed 638 Engine OW zudem dos un e t n 607 Power Steering ss saspe ta sarpi maoni taiea 467 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 669 Fog Lights sce co ne rre 291 Fog Light Service olei eens 663 Folding Rear Seat e 5555 e tas 158 Forward Collision Warning liess 218 Four Way Hazard Flasher 00 569 Four Wheel Drive 0 00000 eee eee 438 Operation es cce esasa ei ee Re a pee dd 438 SYSTEMS dass ace
303. er when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path RCP mode the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio is muted 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro priate side view mirror based on a detected object If the turn signal is then activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and de tected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audible alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on will also be muted NOTE Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system the radio is also muted When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio is also muted Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored
304. er Case Fluid Level Check For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should be inspected If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Adding Fluid Add fluid at the filler hole until it runs out of the hole when the vehicle is in a level position Drain First remove fill plug then remove drain plug Recom mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft Ibs 20 to 34 N m CAUTION When installing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection Of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information 642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN CAUTION Continued in transmission shift quality and or torque converter Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s specified transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid NOTE No
305. er N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information e Memory Linked to Fob If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press the Memory Linked to Fob button on the touchscreen and select from On or Off Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Memory Linked to Fob is set to ON when the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information e Power Lift Gate Alert If Equipped This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is raising or lowering To make your selection press the Power Lift Gate Alert button on the touchscreen and select from On or Off Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 Auto Comfort Systems If Equipped After pressing the Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Auto On Driver Heated Ventilated Seat amp Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel wi
306. er arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the wiper arm NOTE Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap 4 Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade move the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm to disengage 0726033341 628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 5 Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass Installing The Rear Wiper 1 Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass NOTE The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without un snapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle 0726033342 2 Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm p P T Y E 3 Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the end of the wiper arm Grab the bottom end of the 1 Wiper Blade wiper arm with one hand and press the wiper blade 2 Wiper Blade Pivot Pin flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place 3 Wiper Arm 4 Wiper Arm Receptacle 4 Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into place ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629 Adding Washer Fluid This vehicle is equipped with a Driver Information Di
307. ere is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON a chime will sound and the DID will still display a pressure value in the different color graphic display and an Inflate to XXX kPa message will be displayed After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the DID will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the DID will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for five seconds and then dis play dashes in place of the pressure value Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the DID will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pr
308. ers for the front seat passengers SCHEDE ee ae located in the center console 035133143 0351042347 Rear Cupholders Front Cupholders UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271 STORAGE To open the glove compartment pull outward on the Glove Compartment latch and lower the glove compartment door The glove compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel 035209522 Opened Glove Compartment 035209521 Glove Compartment 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SSS Door Storage Console Features Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy The center console contains both an upper and a lower access storage area 035209525 035209531 Door Panel Storage Storage Compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273 To open the upper storage compartment pull upward on Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the the small latch located on the lid lower storage compartment Storage Compartment Latches 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM Your vehicle may have an optional CD or DVD player WARNING located in the center console Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision CARGO AREA FEATURES Rechargeable Flashlight The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of the cargo
309. es are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will turn on To make your selection press the Auto On Driver Heated Ventilated Seat amp Steer ing Wheel With Vehicle Start button on the touchscreen then select either Off Remote Start or All Starts until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Easy Exit Seat If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press the Easy Exit Seat button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MMM e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status press the press the or button to choose f
310. ess is programmed in Uconnect Settings all doors will unlock when you push the electronic liftgate release If Unlock Driver Door 1st press is programmed in Uconnect Settings the liftgate will unlock when you push the electronic liftgate release For further information refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel To Lock The Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft 1 0 m of the liftgate push the passive entry lock button located to the right of electronic liftgate release NOTE The liftgate unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release 0222003451 Passive Entry Lock Button Location 1 Electronic Liftgate Release 2 Lock Button Location ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas sengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle Power Liftgate If Equipped The power liftgate may be opened by pushing Q2 the electronic liftgate release refer to Keyless Enter N Go located in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle or by pushing the LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Push the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate Once the liftgate is open pushing the button twi
311. essure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information STARTING AND OPERATING 527 General Information FUEL REQUIREMENTS This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and 3 6L Engine If Equipped RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the aa enn This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent fuel This device must accept any interference received economy and performance when using including interference that may cause undesired op high quality unleaded regular gasoline eration i having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines e This device may not cause harmful interference The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses 5 7L Engine If Equipped United States MRXMERCTX1 Canada 2546A MERCTX1 This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasoline having 528 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufacturer recom mends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit
312. estraint The Active Head Restraints AHR will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the driver or front passenger in certain types of rear impacts Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint LB ora Push Button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and rearward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head 022607494 Active Head Restraint Normal Position Active Head Restraint Tilted 030907533 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x NOTE e The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restrain
313. et off s road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the brake linings parking X X X X X X X brake function EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 677 Mileage or time passed whichever comes first 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 60 000 70 000 80 000 90 000 3 3 83 8 8 8 4 OrYears 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 18 8 3 8 5 8 R8 als Inspect transfer case fluid X X X X Additional Maintenance Replace engine air filter X X X X X Replace the air conditioning filter X X X X X X Replace spark plugs 3 6L engine Replace spark plugs 5 7L engine Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever comes first M A l N T E N A N C E E C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N o E S C H E D U L E S 8 necessary Mileage or time passed g g g g 8 g 8 g whichever comes first S S 8 2 8 8 g S 8 g Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 orKiomses 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 SIS giS 8 8 3 8 5 8 amp 8 R3 Change transfer case fluid X Inspect and replace PCV valve if X The spark plug change interval is mileage based only yearly intervals do not apply
314. etect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle The six ParkSense sensors located in the front fascia bumper monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 47 in 120 cm from the front fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orientation of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Program mable Features section of the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the Driver Information Display DID It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and or front fascia bumper and the detected obstacle Refer to Driver Information Display DID for further informa tion UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 ParkSense Display The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in the left and or right rear regions based on Th ine displ ll indicatine th ee the object s distance and location relative to the vehicle status when the vehic
315. ethod is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph 5 km h the transfer case will not allow the shift You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL N position without first fully engaging the parking brake The NEUTRAL N position dis engages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop with the engine running 2 Press and hold the brake pedal 3 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL STARTING AND OPERATING 443 4 If vehicle is equipped with Quadra Lift air suspen sion ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height 5 Using a ballpoint pen or similar object push and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL N button lo cated by the selector switch for four seconds The light behind the NEUTRAL N symbol will blink indicating shift in progress The light will stop blink ing stay on solid when the shift to NEUTRAL N is complete A NEUTRAL message will appear in the Driver Information Display DID Refer to Driver Information Display DID in Understanding Your 0582003302 Instrument Panel for further information NEUTRAL N Switch 6 After the shift is completed and
316. evice may not cause harmful interference 2 The device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration of the device Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Control Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode a Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds The Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator Electronic Speed Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h To change between the different control modes press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC ON OFF button which turns the ACC and the NORMAL Fixed Speed ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF Pressing of the NORMAL Fixed Speed ELECTRONIC SPEED CON TROL ON OFF button will result in turning ON chang ing to the Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Con trol mode WARNING In the normal Cruise Control mode the system will not react to vehicles ahead In addition the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle to vehicle
317. f used for long periods Continued 032173457 Electronic Speed Control Buttons 1 ON OFF 4 SET DECEL 2 SET ACCEL 5 CANCEL 3 RESUME UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button to activate the electronic speed control CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is on To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control is off The system should be turned off when not in use 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET or SET button and relea
318. f when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press the Lights w Wipers button on the touch screen and make your selection Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Auto High Beams If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will activate deactivate automatically under certain con ditions To make your selection press the Auto High Beams button on the touchscreen and make your selec tion Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Refer to Lights Auto High Beams If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MMM e Daytime Running Lights If Equipped When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touch screen and make your selection Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Flash Lights w Lock When this feature is selected the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry Feature To make your selection press the Flash Lights w Lock button on the touchscreen and select from On or Off Press the back arrow button on
319. f your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar such as steel wool or scouring powder that will cause that destroys the paint and protective coating scratch metal and painted surfaces have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of can result in damage or removal of paint and decals the owner 646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN f you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care e All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners abrasives or polishing compounds They will perma nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH Used on a regular basis this is all that is required
320. fety index 53 htm Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Infants and Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Toddlers younger and who have not reached the Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear height or weight limits of their child seat of the vehicle restraint Small Children Children who are at least two years old or Forward Facing Child Restraint with a who have out grown the height or weight five point Harness facing forward in the limit of their rear facing child restraint rear seat of the vehicle ne THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Child Size Height Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Larger Children Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve hicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints of their booster seat Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of thei
321. ffected wiper arm or blade with a new unit Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged Front Wiper Blade Removal Installation CAUTION Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged 1 Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the MEN 0726033351 glass until the wiper arm is in the full up position Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position 1 Wiper 2 Release Tab 3 Wiper Arm 624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm flip up 3 With the wiper blade disengaged remove the wiper the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding the wiper arm with one hand slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position 1 Wiper Blade 2 Release Tab 3 Wiper Arm blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other hand move the wiper blade toward the right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper blade from the wiper arm MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625 Installing The Front Wipers 1 Lift the wiper arm off of the glass until the wiper arm is in the full up position 2 Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the blade side of the wiper facing up
322. flow hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emis sions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Fluid Level Check Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood service or immedi ately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir On the outboard side of the reservoir there is a MAX dot and a MIN dot The fluid level must be kept within these two dots Do not add fluid above the MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
323. forward or positon Then usine body presets move taryan and rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat des Me ieee e Do He lay the seat adjaster cushion near the floor eo EN WARNING Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Adjustment Bar 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment WARNING Recline To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the side of the seat lean back to the desired position and release the lever To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death a Front Passenger Seat Fold Flat Feature If Equipped To fold the seatback to the flat load floor position lift the recline lever and push the seatback forward To return to the seating position raise the seatback and lock it into C place 7 2 Recline Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 WARNING e Persons who are
324. g Mirror Switch 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee 030409528 u m Power Mirror Switch 1 Mirror Direction Control 2 Mirror Selection Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The Drivers side mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster if equipped Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Tilt Mirrors In Reverse Available With Memory Seat Only If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground rearward of the front doors Outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE Outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position Each stored memory seat set
325. g on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning e The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ee STARTING AND OPERATING 475 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or othe
326. g to specification e ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire sur roundings across the top of the screen After five sec onds this note will disappear To change the mode status press the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting had been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345 e ParkView Backup Camera Delay When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned OFF the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned ON the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph 12 km h the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the Controls button on the touchscreen the settings button on
327. gate release NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed in Uconnect Settings all doors will unlock when you push the electronic liftgate release If Unlock Driver Door 1st press is programmed in Uconnect the liftgate will unlock when you press the electronic liftgate release For further information refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel To Lock The Vehicle s Doors With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters Push The Door Handle Button To Lock within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handle press the door handle LOCK button to lock all four doors and liftgate 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door NOTE handle button This could unlock the door s After pushing the door handle button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead Closeness to mobile devices can have an effect on the passive entry system The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel E THINGS T
328. ger cars are not intended It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on road and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle The two wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on road use only It is not intended for off road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four wheel drive vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read the Owner s Manual Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering transmis sion and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics Always observe federal state provincial and local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Refer to On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Starting And Operating for further information en INTRODUCTION 5 This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc
329. handle Pull it over the cargo area 2 Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in the pillar trim cover Lower Storage Bins 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM 3 The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in WARNING place In a collision a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store it in the vehicle 035407397 Rear Cargo Cover ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279 Rear Cargo Tie Downs WARNING The rear cargo tie downs located on the cargo area floor should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is moving To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts e Cargo tie down hooks are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or accident a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle han dling To avoid loss of co
330. handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked Grab The Door Handle To Unlock NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver s front door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati cally The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition is OFF 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once
331. hanging lanes and mance may be limited it may not detect the vehicle until it s too late for the ACC system to take action ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane There may not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be atten tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary me c v C ai hd fe 032363288 ACC Hill Example UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead EE 032400173 Lane Changing Example 032400174 Narrow Vehicle Example 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Stationary Objects And Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles For example ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary 032400175 n Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example General Information This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS GEN 210 220 310 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 The d
332. hat the brakes must be applied manually An audible chime will sound when the brakes are released Continued 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation The speed control buttons located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the ACC system Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons 1 NORMAL FIXED SPEED CRUISE CONTROL ON OFF 5 DISTANCE SETTING INCREASE 6 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL 2 SET ACCEL ACC ON OFF 3 RESUME 7 DISTANCE SETTING DECREASE 4 SET DECEL 8 CANCEL NOTE Any chassis suspension or tire size modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph 32 km h When the system is turned on and in the READY state the Driver Information Display DID displays ACC Ready When the system is OFF the DID displays Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Off en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 NOTE You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions e e e When in Four Wheel Drive Low When you apply the brakes When the parking brake is set When the automatic transmission is in PARK RE VERSE or NEUTRAL When the Vehicle speed is outside of the spe
333. have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required e Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 1 653 Ibs 750 kg Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations 554 STARTING AND OPERATING 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground 057003766 Four Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn
334. he Homelink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand held transmitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 5 Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Non Rolling Code To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws
335. he air suspension switches Refer to Quadra Lift If Equipped in Starting and Oper ating for further information When To Use 4WD LOW Range If Equipped When off road driving shift to 4WD LOW for additional traction This range should be limited to extreme situa tions such as deep snow mud or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range CAUTION Do not drive in 4WD LOW Range on dry pavement driveline damage may result 4WD LOW Range locks front and rear drivelines together and does not allow for differential action between the front to rear driveshafts Driving in 4WD LOW on pavement will cause driveline binding use only on wet or slippery surfaces 460 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water NOTE Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to 20 inches 51 cm of water while crossing small rivers or streams To maintain optimal performance of your vehi cle s heating and ventilation system it is recommended to switch the system into recirculation mode during water fording CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always check water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driv
336. he detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beam Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on or shut the high beams off WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering col umn The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located on the end of the lever For information on the rear wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 031563090 Multifunction Lever 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Windshield Wiper Operation CAUTION Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent positions for intermittent settings the fifth detent for low wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper operation Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the park position If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and th
337. he rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 WARNING Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the DRE seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be 1 C
338. he recommended fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is between 64 and 192Kbps Variable bit rates are also supported For both formats the recommended sample rate is either 44 1kHz or 48kHz e To change the current file use the remote control s or Blu ray Disc player s A button to advance to the next file or the V button to return to the start of the current or previous file Disc Errors If the Blu ray Disc player is unable to read the disc a Disc Error message is displayed on the rear screen and Radio displays A dirty damaged or incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a Disc Error message If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or visible errors that persists for two seconds the Blu ray Disc player will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping forward one to three seconds at a time If the end of the disc is reached the Blu ray Disc player will return to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the first track The Blu ray Disc player may shut down during ex tremely hot conditions such as when the vehicle s inte rior temperature is above 120 F 48 9 C When this occurs the player will display High Temp and will shut off the Rear Seat displays until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the Blu ray Disc player 378 UNDERSTANDING
339. he vehicle brand e The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle 4 You should be able to speak with the 9 1 1 operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed NOTE Once a connection is made between the vehicle s 9 1 1 Call system and the 9 1 1 operator the 9 1 1 operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed Once the 9 1 1 operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle s 9 1 1 Call system the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle The vehicle s 9 1 1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9 1 1 operator until the 9 1 1 operator terminates the connection 5 The 9 1 1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate emergency responders and provide them with impor tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates WARNING e If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger e g fire or smoke is visible dangerous road conditions or location do not wait for voice contact from a 9 1 1 operator All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location The 9 1 1 Call system is embedded into the vehi cle s electrical system Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle s electrical sys tem This may prevent your vehicle from sending a Continued WARNING Continued signal to initiate an emergency call To a
340. hen the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on e A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use the fuel filler door emergency release 1 Open the liftgate 2 Push the inboard edge of the left storage bin to the center this will pop up the outboard edge 3 Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to disengage snaps 4 Remove the storage bin 5 Pull the release cable to open the fuel door push the release cable back to the home position to re seat the fuel door latch to the closed position STARTING AND OPERATING 539 TAN VEHICLE LOADING z NS Certification Label Bb EY As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration regulations your vehicle has a certification label gt affixed to the driver s side door or pillar e de This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification FA Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the Month Day and H
341. hen these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed e If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will soon occur Immediate service is required will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible 604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration C nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recentl
342. here are two switches that control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback 1 Seatback Switch 2 Seat Switch Power Seat Switches 030909538 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward Reclining The Seatback The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward move in the direction of the switch Release the switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release when the desired position has been reached the switch when the desired position is reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down WARNING The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull ao i upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous will move in the direction of the switch Release the Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of switch when the desired position has been reached control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Tilting The Seat Up Or Down Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious down Pull upward or push downward on the front of injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted the seat switch the front of the s
343. his telltale indicates engine oil temperature is cr high If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MMM e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential elec trical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an authorized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the YA Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the e
344. hold it ram battery or the battery in another vehicle This type 3 Push and release the ENGINE START STOP button of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer once to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergen wins for dirtier intormation The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure 424 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN After Starting WARNING The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED electrical cord could cause electrocution The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION grounded thrce wire extension cord 7 MEET grounded three wire extension cord WARNING The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the The engine block heater cord is located vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re e 3 6L Engine Coiled and strapped to the engine oil verse Yo
345. hrysler Group LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 2 10 INTRODUCTION cite su rer rer besa di ohi repade ta M fran SNR kesit Epe eai Uta 3 HN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE sse eee 11 I UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE esee e 115 mm UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ien 285 s STARTING AND OPERATING au Dose theo pda rd pe wks Dau pa eed a ow 413 mm WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 cre so pe Ec RE EEEY een E ERI RUCRUE UTR ceed 567 m MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 9 93 554p 3 CEA EDU RE REED MW SUC SU RR RES 599 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 4 6 id tud cbe S PR ERES VOCE e UE emen d o d 673 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 46e krekErER AERE RE ERE T ERE RR 681 9 INDEX m 691 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS B INTRODUCTION eeeeeeenn BB BRR 4 B WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 8 M ROLLOVER WARNING eeeeensne 5 BI VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 8 ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 6 B VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 9 4 INTRODUCTION EE INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This is a specialized utility vehicle It can go places and perform tasks that conventional passen
346. iagonal or bias construction 15 16 18 Rim diameter in inches in Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry en STARTING AND OPERATING 495 EXAMPLE H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire ram e XL Extra load or reinforced tire or e LL Light load tire or e C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 496 STARTING AND OPERATING Emm Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be
347. ibutions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible 542 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem
348. ifter Instead the shift lever is spring loaded and moves forward and rearward always return ing to the center position after each gear is selected The transmission gear PRND is displayed both on the shift lever and in the Driver Information Display DID To select a gear range press the lock button on the shift lever and move the lever rearward or forward You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or RE VERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Sys tem in this section To shift past multiple gear ranges at once such as PARK to DRIVE move the lever past the first or second detent Select the DRIVE range for normal driving The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever provides PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL DRIVE and SPORT shift positions Once in the DRIVE range tapping the shift lever rearward will toggle between SPORT mode and
349. impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions including some collisions at certain angles or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy Rollover Events Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events The ORC determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro priate based on the severity and type of collision Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate A slower developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle A faster developing event may deploy the seat belt preten sioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of the vehicle The rollover sensing system may also deploy the seat belt pretensioners with or without the SABs and SABICs on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event If A Deployment Occurs The Advance
350. imum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 546 STARTING AND OPERATING EENEEEEEEEEEMMMMEMEMEMEMMCCCCC Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Model Frontal Area E boa m ccn uf 3 6L 4x2 55 sq ft 5 11 sqm 6 200 lbs 2 812 kg 620 Ibs 281 kg 3 6L 4x4 55 sq ft 5 11 sqm 6 200 lbs 2 812 kg 620 Ibs 281 kg 5 7L 4x2 55 sq ft 5 11 sqm 7 400 lbs 3 357 kg 740 Ibs 336 kg 5 7L 4x4 55 sq ft 5 11 sqm 7 200 lbs 3 266 kg 720 Ibs 327 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as information The addition of passengers and cargo may part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire Weight GTW Redistributing cargo to the trailer may and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Information in Starting and Operating for further Rating GAWR of 3 700 Ibs 1 678 kg STARTING AND OPERATING 547 Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal Summit Models
351. ine Temperature Hot Remote Start Aborted Too Cold e Battery Voltage Low Remote Start Aborted Door Open e Service Electronic Throttle Control Lights On Remote Start Aborted Hood Open Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mMm e e e e e e e e e Remote Start Aborted Time Expired Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset Service Airbag System Service Airbag Warning Light Door Open Doors Open Liftgate Open Gear Not Available Shift Not Allowed Vehicle Speed To High To Shift Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse Autostick Unavailable Service Required Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake Trans Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool Transmission Cool Ready to Drive Service Transmission Service Shifter Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On Washer Fluid Low Service Air Suspension System Normal Ride Height Achieved Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 Entry Exit Ride Height Achieved DID White Telltales e Selected Ride Height Not Permitted This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell tales These telltales include e Service Air Suspension System Immediately oc E e Cruise Ready Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height e
352. ine speed in revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 2 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 3 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light es If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 4 High Beam Indicator Z Indicates that headlights are on high beam 5 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped
353. ing You could lose control and have a collision Continued 518 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM CAUTION Continued Observe the traction device manufacturer s instruc tions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufac turer s if it is less than 30 mph 48 km h Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed NOTE The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the correct vehicle position following a tire rotation The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram EL E SS E 0557037
354. ing brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as a problem es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109 SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat a
355. ing through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle If you must drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to entering Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave effects Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches 23 cm The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting ee STARTING AND OPERATING 461 Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches 51 cm and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects Maximum speed in 20 inches 51 cm of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine oil transmission oil axle transfer case to assure the fluids have not been contami nated Contaminated fluid milky foamy in appearance should be flushed changed as soon as possible to pre vent com
356. ings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 8 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 9 SYNC Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature On Off The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature 10 Blower Control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system There are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as follows Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob coun terclockwise ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387 Button On The To
357. inued 640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to aal Cored 22 to 29 ft Ibs 30 to 40 N m CAUTION Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them and cause them to leak Front Rear Axle Fluid For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1 8 in exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected 3 mm below the bottom of the fill hole If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Front Axle Fluid Level Check CAUTION The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1 8 in Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them 3 mm below the bottom of the fill hole and cause them to leak Rear Axle Fluid Level Check The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22 to 29 ft Ibs 30 to 40 N m ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641 Selection Of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Transf
358. ion of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pushing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset button CD Player Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you push the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc 380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mMm CD DVD Blu ray Disc MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD Blu ray Disc in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7
359. ion to OFF In addition to the chime the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster NOTE With the Uconnect system the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Continued en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 WARNING Continued Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked car is
360. ipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability 474 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN A feature of the TCS system Brake Limited Differential BLD functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if ESC system is in the Partial Off mode Refer to Elec tronic Stability Control ESC in this section for further information Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING e The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from actin
361. ir conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a If Equipped R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilitie
362. ire inflation pressure is of or below 14 psi 96 kPa Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi ately A Run Flat tire is not repairable It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor mation Spare Tires If Equipped NOTE For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire please refer to Tire Service Kit in What To Do In Emergencies for further information CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire EN STARTING AND OPERATING 511 rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire descri
363. ired channel If audio is still not heard check that fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones ay Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones 0449001354 1 Power Button 2 Volume Control 3 Channel Selection Switch 370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee Controls The headphone power indicator and controls are located on the right ear cup NOTE The rear video system must be turned on before sound can be heard from the headphones To conserve battery life the headphones will automatically turn off approximately three minutes after the rear video system is turned off Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones 1 Ensure the Remote Control channel screen selector switch is in the same position as the headphone selector switch NOTE When both the headphone and the remote control channel selector switches are on Channel 1 the Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned to the audio on Channel 1 When both the headphone and the remote control channel selector switches are on Channel 2 the Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned to the audio on Channel 2 Push the SOURCE button on the remote control Pushing the SOURCE button will advance to the next mode When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navi gate to the available modes and push the OK button to select the new mode To ca
364. is is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added ee STARTING AND OPERATING 541 Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle Weigh ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distr
365. is light only shows that the parking brake is applied Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle It does not show the degree of brake application e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever e When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle Continued 470 STARTING AND OPERATING EBEN WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e When leaving the vehicle always make sure the e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode re ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or move the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in vehicle PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or and cause damage or injury in a location accessible to children and do not
366. is tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 493 e Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design emergency use only Temporary high pressure com standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded pact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT the sidewall preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Example Size Designation P215 65R15XL 95H 215 65R15 96H LT235 85R16C T145 80D18 103M 31x10 5 R15 LT B P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards or blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards or LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards or T or Temporary spare tire or 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 235 145 Section width in millimeters mm 494 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN EXAMPLE 65 85 80 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire or 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction or D means d
367. isplay no menclature including the trip functions and the naviga tion system if equipped Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen then press the desired lan guage button on the touchscreen Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Units When in this display you may select to have the DID odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of measure Press US or Metric to make your selection Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a button on the touchscreen is pressed Press the Touchscreen Beep button on the touchscreen then select from on or off Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Voice After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings To change the Voice Response Length press the Voice Response Length button on the touchscreen and select from Brief or Detailed Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Show Command List When in this display you may change the Show Com mand List setti
368. it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 022668566 e Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position e S Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See What is the weight limit child s weight 4 weight of the child restraint for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 Ibs 29 5 kg position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat No Do not use the seat belt when you use the belt be used together to attach a rear LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint facing or forward facing child restraint Can a child seat be ins
369. itch forward and release to Express Close ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation NOTE The power sunroof switch can remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the vehicles ignition is cycled to the Off position Opening either front door will cancel this feature This feature is programmable using the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlets that can be used to power cellular phones small electronics
370. itch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop erly See your authorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis charge HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lamps This dimin ishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges Halogen Headlamps If Equipped Open the hood Turn the low or high beam bulb one quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663 Front Turn Signal 2 Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the 1 Open the hood front fog lamp housing 2 Turn the turn signal bulb one quarter turn counter clockwise to remove from housing 3 Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb CAUTION CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil e Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface contaminati
371. kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor tant Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle operation Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires 508 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria The tire has not been driven on when flat The damage is only on the tread section of your tire sidewall damage is not repairable e The puncture is no greater than a 1 4 of an inch 6 mm Consult an authorized tir
372. ke fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 13 Fuel GaugelFuel Door Reminder The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 14 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light i Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Drivi
373. l Starting System S24 20a duae adobe 24 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 22 Arm The Alarm FCC General Information Panic Alarm 0 0 ns 25 Programming Additional Key Fobs 19 Programming Additional Transmitters 19 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 378 Remote Starting Uconnect Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Settings Remote Starting System ll ee eee eee 24 Replacement Bulbs sc erede peners eaa tensie 659 Replacement Keys sepa esce xg e re Rer es 18 Replacement Parts llle 605 Replacement Tires llle 515 Reporting Safety Defects 00 0 687 Restraints Child lille 83 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 0 277 Roll Over Warning ssa pansi Eed ries p pue aita 5 Rotation Tires a es a Roue de EUR E 518 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle iiis 110 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 112 Safety Defects Reporting llle 687 Safety Exhaust GaS sos ck em pede d emp Safety Information Tire Safety TIPS kb ee ba wale Ses e TR eh Y xta 109 Schedule Maintenance sse 674 Seat Belt Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 58 Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 61 Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode 63 Energy Management Feature 60 Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 62 Lap Shoulder Belt Operation 56 L
374. l under the mirror is set in the day position toward the windshield Adjusting Rearview Mirror 0304049206 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind shield The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you NOTE The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is dis abled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear view viewing The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned On or Off through the touchscreen e Press the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the feature On e Press the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn the feature Off 0304049205 Automatic Dimming Mirror If equipped the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a 9 1 1 button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 NOTE The ASSIST and 9 1 1 features operate through the Uconnect Access service These buttons will only operate as long as your Uconnect Access service is active Refer to your Uconnect System supplement manual for further information ASSIST
375. lacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for mainte nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself 606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control CAUTION systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could WARNING result in more costly repairs
376. layable in the Blu ray Disc player check with the disc recording software publisher for more information about burning playable discs The recommended method for labeling recordable discs CD R CD RW and DVD R is with a permanent marker Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the disc become stuck and cause permanent damage to the DVD player Compressed Audio Files MP3 and WMA The Blu ray Disc player is capable of playing MP3 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 and WMA Windows Media Audio files from a CD Data disc usually a CD R or CD RW e The Blu ray Disc player always uses the file exten sion to determine the audio format so MP3 files must always end with the extension mp3 or MP3 and WMA files must always end with the extension wma or WMA To prevent incorrect playback do not use these extensions for any other types of files For MP3 files only version 1 ID3 tag data such as artist name track title album etc are supported Any file that is copy protected such as those down loaded from many online music stores will not play The Blu ray player will automatically skip the file and begin playing the next available file ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377 Other compression formats such as AAC MP3 Pro Ogg Vorbis and ATRAC3 will not play The Blu ray player will automatically skip the file and begin play ing the next available file If you are creating your own files t
377. layed while driving in adverse weather conditions The ACC FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the windshield and the camera located on the back side of the inside rear view mirror They may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present the system will return to full function ality NOTE If the ACC FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield message occurs frequently e g more than once on every trip without any snow rain mud or other obstruction have the windshield and forward facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Service ACC FCW Warning If the system turns off and the DID displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Required or Cruise FCW Unavail able Service Required there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC func tionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions ACC will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating ACC again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations ACC m
378. ldings structures geographic terrain or tunnels NOTE Never place anything on or near the vehicle s wireless and GPS antennas You could prevent wireless and GPS signal reception which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call Wireless and GPS signal reception is required for the 9 1 1 Call system to function properly General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received includ ing interference that may cause undesired operation CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Some vehicles will not h
379. le is in REVERSE or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected If an object is detected in the left and or right rear region the display will show a single arc in the left and or right 0 rear region and the system will produce a tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone P will change from a single 1 2 second tone to slow to fast to continuous 002g Park Assist Ready 0329045581 Park Assist Ready 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Single 1 2 Second Tone Slow Tone UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 P R R i BH D D S S SE 0329001176 0329001175 Fast Tone Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the DID display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN WARNING ALERTS Rear Distance Greater than 79 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than 12 in in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 30 cm Front Distance Greater than 47 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than 12 in in cm 47 in 120 cm 120 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow for rear Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone only for rear only Arcs None Ath Solid 3rd
380. lect menu e When the screen is reopened the video screen will automatically turn back on and show the appropriate display menu or media If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard verify that the headphones are turned on the ON indicator is illuminated and the headphone selector switch is on the desired channel If the headphones are turned on push the remote control s power button to turn audio on If audio is still not heard check that fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones Disc Formats The Blu ray Disc player is capable of the playing the following types of discs 12 mm or 8 mm diameter e BD BDMV Profile 1 1 BDAV Profile 1 1 e DVD DVD Video DVD Audio AVCREC AVCHD DVD VR e CD CD DA VCD CD TEXT e DVD CD MP3 WMA AAC DivX versions 3 6 profile 3 0 E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375 DVD Region Codes The Blu ray Disc player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the player the disc will not play DVD Audio Support When a DVD Audio disc is inserted in the Blu ray Disc player the DVD Audio title on the disc is played by default most DVD Audio discs also have a Video title but the Video title is ignored All multi channel program material is automatically mixed down to two channels which may result in
381. light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pushed 6 Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not acti vate push the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Rolling Code To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Push and hold t
382. lizes a radar sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you NOTE e If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you ACC will maintain a fixed set speed e f the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration not to exceed the original set speed automatically to maintain a preset following distance while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME The Cruise Control system has two control modes e Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles Normal fixed speed electronic speed control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section NOTE Normal fixed speed electronic speed control will not react to preceding vehicles Always be aware of the mode selected You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons The two control modes function differently Always confirm which mode is selected WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is a convenience system It is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always the driver s responsibility to be attentive of road traffic and weather condi tions vehicle speed distance to the vehicle ahead and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all
383. ll automatically turn ON when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C When tempera tures are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will turn ON To make your selection press the Auto Heated Seats button on the touchscreen then select either Off Remote Start or All Starts Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Easy Exit Seats If Equipped When this feature is selected the Driver s seat will automati cally move rearward once the engine is shut off To make your selection press the Easy Exit Seats button on the touchscreen and make your selection Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle Press the Headlight Off Delay button on the touchscreen and choose from 0 30 60 or 90 seconds to select your desired time interval Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equip
384. ll initialize by performing a brief sequence of rotations The Adaptive Headlight System is active only when the vehicle is moving forward The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned On or Off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Headlight Delay To aid in your exit your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately up to 90 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on and then the headlight switch is cycled off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off or by turning the ignition ON NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen this feature can be programmed through the Driver Informa tion Display DID Refer to Driver Information Display DID in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Parking Lights And Panel Lights D0 To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights rotate the headlight switch clockwise To turn off the parking lights rotate the headlight switch back to the O
385. lly open FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Unleaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles ee STARTING AND OPERATING 533 CAUTION Ethanol Fuel E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 8576 fuel ethanol and Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can 15 unleaded gasoline operate on E 85 WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame E85 ETHANOL Fuel Requirements If your vehicle is E 85 compatible it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 056502430 fuel or any mixture of these two fuels E 85 Badge 534 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN For best results a refueling pattern that avoids alternat ing between E 85 and unleaded gasoline is recom mended When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that
386. located below the multifunction lever on the steering column Power Tilt Telescoping Steering Column To tilt the steering column move the lever up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section for further information WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering wheel control button is located within the Uconnect system You can gain access to th
387. loth Do not cover the lens 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M OVERHEAD CONSOLE Front Map Reading Lights If Equipped The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights Lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of Opener HomeLink power liftgate and power sunroof the console These buttons are backlit for night time switches may also be included if equipped visibility 033333450 031433150 Overhead Console Front Map Reading Lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The Courtesy Lights lights also turn on when a door is opened The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is pressed The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top corner of the lens To turn the lights off press the lens a second time 031433151 031464435 Front Map Reading Light Switches Courtesy Lights 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Sunglasses Bin Door At the front of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compart ment access is a push push design Push the chrome pad on the door to open Push the chrome pad on the door to close 033333448 Sunglasses Bin Door GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up
388. low the seat belt to retract As the seat belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR fea ture or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the proce dures in the Service Manual e Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Continued WARNING Continued Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats The locked mode is only used to install rear facing or forward facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic 64 THIN
389. lure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings ee STARTING AND OPERATING 517 TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES CAUTION Use of traction devices require sufficient tire to body clearance Follow these recommendations to guard To avoid damage e your vehicle or tires observe the against damage following precautions Because of restricted traction device clearance be tween tires and other suspension components it is important that only traction devices in good condi e Install on Rear Tires Only tion are used Broken devices can cause serious Due to limited clearance Thule XG 12 Pro or equiva damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise lent is recommended on P245 70 R17 P265 60R18 or occurs that could indicate device breakage Remove 265 50R20 tires the damaged parts of the device before further use e Install device as tightly as possible and then re WARNING tighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Using tires of different size and type M S Snow Traction device must be of proper size for the tire as recommended by the traction device manufacturer Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave ment between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handl
390. luster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions and indicate what actions may be necessary ee STARTING AND OPERATING 435 In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps NOTE In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not re engage after en gine shutdown perform this procedure only in a desired location preferably at your authorized dealer 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK if possible If not shift the transmission to NEUTRAL 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position On vehicles with Keyless Enter N Go press and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns OFF 4 Wait approximately 30 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Paddle Shift Mode Paddle Shift mode is a driver interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehicle Paddle Shift allows you to maxi mize engine braking elimin
391. ly and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched A correctly child s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an X Below Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Weight of the LATCH Seat Belt Only LATCH Seat Belt Top Child Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only Top Tether Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children LATCH Restraint System Anchor Tether We LATCH The next generation of child safety M J 022668173 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where
392. matically from any position If the sunroof is completely closed the shade will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the shade NOTE If the sunroof is open the shade will close to the half open position Pressing the shade close button again will automatically close both the sunroof and shade completely Closing Power Shade Manual Mode To close the shade press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half sec ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof NOTE If the sunshade is in the closed position when the vent switch is pressed the sunshade will automatically cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof opening to the Vent position Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the sw
393. mation on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger s seat before driving You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat 022607492 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism A J 0226048657 e 0226048658 Review Table Below A Downward Movement B Rearward Movement C Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half mmmm XXI 7S N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Supplemental Restraint System SRS 022607494 AHR In Reset Position NOTE e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Head Restraints see an authorized dealer For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints check
394. mer programmable features Many features can vary by vehicle Uconnect 5 0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On Faceplate 1 Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Buttons On The Faceplate Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel In addition there is a Scroll Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instru ment panel Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings i e 30 60 90 push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting i e ON OFF Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and Back buttons located below the Uconnect system Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect touchscreen Push the Screen Off button a second time to 1 Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen turn the touchscreen on 2 Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate Buttons On Touchscreen Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 Buttons On The Touchscreen Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect display Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 5 0 Personal Settings Push the MORE button on the faceplate to display the menu setting screen I
395. mprove performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift ing and heat buildup 434 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN During extremely cold temperatures 22 F 30 C or below transmission operation may be modified depend ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level SPORT S This mode alters the transmission s automatic shift schedule for sportier driving Upshift speeds are in creased to make full use of available engine power To switch between DRIVE and SPORT modes tap the shift lever rearward SPORT mode is only accessible from DRIVE NOTE When Sport Mode is enabled vehicles with the Quadra Lift air suspension system will operate in Aero Mode Please refer to Quadra Lift in Starting and Operating for further information Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission may operate only in certain gears or may not shift at all Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall In some situations the transmission may not re engage if the engine is turned off and restarted The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated A message in the instrument c
396. n inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition replace the seat belt es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111 Air Bag Warning Light e The light should come on and remain on for four fA to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your autho rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
397. n dimmer When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odometer radio and overhead console by rotating the control to its farthest position up until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day 031409585 Dimmer Control Lights On Reminder If the headlights parking lights or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes the interior lights will automatically turn off NOTE Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Front Map Reading Lights If Equipped Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either side of the console These buttons are backlit for night time visibility To turn
398. n Display DID indicating the ve hicle speed is too fast The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph 9 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM ParkSense amp Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect Sys tem Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The ParkSense amp Warning screen is located within the DID It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected ob stacle Refer to Driver Information Display DID for further information ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the DID will display the park assist ready system status Park Assist Ready Park Assist Ready The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in the left and or right rear regions based on the obstacle s distance and location r
399. n REVERSE An open liftgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle CAUTION e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 WARNING WARNING Continued e Drivers must be careful when backing up even could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem when using ParkSense Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles EM obstructions and blind spots before backing up PARKSENSE 6 FRONT AND REAR PARK You are responsible for safety and must continue to ASSIST IF EQUIPPED pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and can result in serious injury or death audible indications of the distance between the rear Before using ParkSenseG it is strongly recom and or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem up or movi
400. n front of your vehicle in close proximity Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal If you do not the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed If this occurs The message DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in the DID The system will not be controlling the distance be tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal To Cancel The following conditions cancel the system The brake pedal is applied The CANCEL button is pressed An Anti Lock Brake System ABS event occurs The shift lever gear selector is removed from the Drive position The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates The vehicle parking brake is applied Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds Driver door is opened at low speeds A Trailer Sway Control TSC event occurs The driver switches ESC to full off mode 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME To Turn Off The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory if The Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON OFF button is pressed The Normal Fixed Speed Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button is pressed e The ignition is turned OFF e You switch to Four Wheel Drive Low To Resume If there is a set speed in memory press the RES resume button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The DID will display the last set speed
401. n or similar object press and hold suspension the engine should be started and left the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL N button lo running for a minimum of 60 seconds with all the cated by the selector switch for one second doors closed at least once every 24 hours This process allows the air suspension to adjust the vehicle s ride height to compensate for temperature effects Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it con nected to the tow vehicle Firmly apply the parking brake 0582003302 Start the engine Press and hold the brake pedal Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL NEUTRAL N Switch oT A c N ee STARTING AND OPERATING 565 7 When the NEUTRAL N indicator light turns off NOTE icone Me NED TRE BUHOR Aier Me NEUE a Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met 9 TRAL N button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the engine OFF Release the brake pedal 10 Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle 11 Start the engine 12 Press and hold the brake pedal 13 Release the parking brake 14 Shift the transmission into DRIVE release the brake pedal and check that the vehicle operates normally before pressing the NEUTRAL N button and must continue to
402. n overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator coolant pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637 When
403. n this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display Voice Clock amp Date Safety amp Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Auto On Comfort Engine Off Options Suspension Compass Settings Au dio Phone Bluetooth Sirius Setup Restore Settings and Clear Personal Data NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time When making a selection press the button on the touch screen to enter the desired mode Once in the desired mode press and release the preferred setting and make your selection Once the setting is complete either press the Back Arrow Done button on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings NOTE All settings should be changed with the ignition in the Run position Display After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MMM e Display Mode When in this display you may select the Auto or Manual display settings To change Mode status press and release the Auto or Manual button on the touchscreen Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen NOTE When Day or Nigh
404. ncel out of the Mode Selection menu push the BACK button on the remote control en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371 Replacing The Headphone Batteries Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for operation To replace the batteries Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of the headphones and then slide the battery cover downward Replace the batteries making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown Replace the battery compartment cover Unwired 6 Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty Who Does This Warranty Cover This warranty covers the initial user or purchaser you or your of this particular Unwired Technology LLC Unwired wire less headphone Product The warranty is not transfer able How Long Does the Coverage Last This warranty lasts as long as you own the Product What Does This Warranty Cover Except as specified below this warranty covers any Product that in normal use is defective in workmanship or materials What Does This Warranty Not Cover This warranty does not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse abuse or modification of the Product other than by Unwired Foam earpieces which will wear over time through normal use are specifically not covered replace ment foam is available for a nominal charge UNWIRED TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULT ING FROM THE USE OF OR
405. nd using a seat belt properly Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate rear doors open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Continued 110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN WARNING Continued e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In additio
406. nd drag the speaker icon use the arrows to adjust or tap the C icon to readjust to the center Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Equalizer This feature allows you to adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the and buttons on the touchscreen Press the back arrow button on the touch screen to return to the previous menu NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting e Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the Off 1 2 or 3 button on the touchscreen Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Surround Sound If Equipped This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection press the Surround Sound button on the touchscreen select On or Off Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e AUX Volume Offset If Equipped This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input To make your selection press the AUX Volume Match E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355 button
407. nditions donot Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or to help you in determining when your tires should be for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop replaced ping Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information I5 Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire 055007576 514 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1 16 of an inch 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Refer to Replacement Tires in this section for further information Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Driving style Tire pressure Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in the need for earlier tire replace ment e Distance
408. ng on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mMm Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
409. ng forward e g during a parking maneuver bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limi vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can tations of this system and recommendations result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors bly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position Continued 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE or DRIVE If ParkSense is enabled at one of these shift lever positions the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph 11 km h or above A display warning will appear in the Driver Information Display DID indicat ing the vehicle is above ParkSense operating speed The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph 9 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can d
410. ng settings will be available Restore Settings When this feature is selected it will reset the Display Clock Audio and Radio Settings to their default settings To restore the settings to their default setting press the Restore Settings button A pop up will appear asking Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default select Yes to restore or Cancel to exit Once the settings are restored a pop up appears stating settings reset to default Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to exit Clear Personal Data After pressing the Clear Personal Data Settings button on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail able e Clear Personal Data When this feature is selected it will remove personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets To remove personal information press the Clear Personal Data button and a pop up will appear asking Are you sure you want to clear all personal data select Yes to Clear or Cancel to exit Once the data has been cleared a pop up appears stating Personal data cleared Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mMm Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 8 4 Personal Settings Press the Apps or the Controls button on the touch screen then press the Settings button on the touch screen to display the menu setting screen In this mode th
411. ng the Clock button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Sync Time With GPS This feature will allow the radio to sync time with a GPS signal To change the Sync Time setting press the Sync time with GPS button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touch screen to return to the previous menu e Set Time Hours This feature will allow you to adjust the hours The Sync time with GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked To make your selection press the ow or buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or down Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Set Time Minutes This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes The Sync time with GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked To make your selection press the or buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or down Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Hon e Time Format This feature will allow you to select the time format display setting Press the Time Format button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu E UNDERSTAN
412. ng the release latch towards the tether to unlock the lever 0605001181 Release Latch en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 593 2 Once the tension has been released and the lever has been unlocked be sure it is stowed properly and locks into position Stowed Position NOTE Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back in place TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service If the trans mission and drivetrain are operable disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under Recreational Towing in the Starting and Operating section NOTE Vehicles equipped with Quadra Lift must be placed in Transport mode before tying them down from the body on a trailer or flatbed truck Refer to the section on Quadra Lift for more information If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode for example engine will not run tie downs must be fastened to the axles not to the body Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and or cause loss of proper tie down tension 5904 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EBENEN Towing Wheels OFF 2WD Models 4WD Models Condition the Ground Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable See instructions in Recreational Tow e Transmission in NEUTRAL ing under Starting and Operating e 30 mph 48 km h max speed e Transmission in PARK e 30 miles 48 km
413. ng your when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to a load This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 0 0 ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS ll DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY DID DID Displays Engine Oil Life Reset 0 DID Messages DID White Telltales 0 DID Amber Telltales DID Red Telltales DID Green Telltales llle 311 DID Selectable Menultems Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items Uconnect SETTINGS 000 Buttons On The Faceplate 318 Buttons On The Touchscreen 319 Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 5 0 Personal Settings 319 Customer Programmable Features Uconnect 8 4 Personal Settings 336 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MMM ll Uconnect amp RADIOS
414. ngine is running immediate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e Electric Power Steering Malfunction If Equipped el e Liftgate Ajar This telltale is on when the Electric Power Steering is not operating and needs service This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate may be ajar UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 DID Green Telltales e Electronic Speed Control SET This telltale will illuminate green when the O electronic speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Con trol in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle DID Selecta
415. ngs To change the Show Command List settings press the Show Command List button on the touchscreen and select from Always With Help or Never Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Clock amp Date After pressing the Clock amp Date button on the touch screen the following settings will be available e Set Time When in this display you may set the time and format manually Press the Set Time button then choose from a 12 hour or 24 hour format Press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust then select AM or PM Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Set Date When in this display you may set the date manually Press the Set Date button then press the corresponding arrows above and below the current date to adjust Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Safety Assistance After pressing the Safety Assistance button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e ParkSense The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h It will provide an alert audible and or visual to indicate the proximity to other objects E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 The system can be enabled with Sound Only or
416. ning tabs fully engage the cover CAUTION The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often 8 Reinstall the glove compartment door on the glove compartment door hinge and reattach the glove com partment tension tether by inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment and sliding the clip away from the face of the glove compartment door 9 Push the door to the near closed position to reengage the glove compartment travel stops NOTE Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate decklid sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mecha nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated 622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHI
417. nition to the OFF position When you cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position the driver seat will move about 24 in 60 mm rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you cycle the vehicles ignition to the ACC or RUN position The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0 9 in 22 7 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 NOTE The Easy Entry Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory The Easy Entry Exit feature is enabled or later disabled through the programmable features in the Uconnect system Refer to Uconnect Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the release lever located below the instrument panel and in front of the driver s door 031309526 Hood Release 2 Reach under the hood move safety latch to the left and lift the hood 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latche
418. nnot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme diately Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well NOTE Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys tem perform the following functions Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Unlock the doors automatically System Reset Procedure In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON RUN to ignition OFF Air Bag Warning Light e The air bags must be ready to inflate for your ry protection in a collision The Occupant Re straint Controller ORC moni
419. now Mud And Sand 461 Hill Climbin 2e 462 Traction Downhill 000 463 After Driving Off Road 463 POWER STEERING sss ogniu 464 36L ENGINE uoc Puteo dre eee tou 464 57L BASING as or sea 465 Power Steering Fluid Check 467 ll FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5 7L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED 468 B PARKING BRAKE seseeeennnne 468 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 415 Bl BRAKE SYSTEM 00 000 ee nnn A71 Selec Speed Control SSC If Equipped E ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 471 D nc OU MEN Be Des Brake oye ARS kava sees itia ids ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And Traction Control System TCS 473 ESC OFF Indicator Light 490 Brake Assist System BAS 474 W TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 492 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 475 Tire Markings s i sex Reden 9 Electronic Stability Control ESC 475 Tire Identification Number TIN Trailer Sway Control TSC 478 Tire Terminology And Definitions 497 Hill Start Assist HSA 0 479 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 499 Ready Alert Braking If Equipped 481 W TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 504 Rain Brake Support
420. ns the active braking may not be fully available Once the condition that limited the sys tem performance is no longer present the system will return to its full performance state If the problem per sists see your authorized dealer Service FCW Warning If the system turns off and the DID displays e ACC FCW Unavailable Service Required Cruise FCW Unavailable Service Required This indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever gear selector is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever gear selector position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph 11 km h or above When in REVERSE and above the system s operating speed a warning will appear within the Driver Informatio
421. nterior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars NOTE If not equipped with crossbars your authorized dealer can order and install MOPAR crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283 To move the crossbars loosen the attachments located at the upper edge of each crossbar approximately eight turns using the anti theft wrench provided with the MOPAR crossbars Then move the crossbar to the desired position keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame Once the crossbar is in the desired position retighten the with the wrench to lock the crossbar into position NOTE
422. nto your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645 e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu Special Care lated on your vehicle use MOPARO Super Kleen Bug If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive and Tar Remover to remove near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR a month Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing open that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials e I
423. ntrol resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Rear Cargo Tie Downs Continued 280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left door center pillar Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos sible e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear wiper washer controls are located on the multi function lever on the left side of the steering column The rear wiper washer is operated by rotating a switch located at the middle of the lever 036463509 Rear Wiper Washer Control NJ Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the first detent for intermittent operation and to the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation Rotating the center portion upward once more will activate the washer pump which will con tinue to operate as long as the switch is held Upon release of the switch the wipers will resume the continu ous rear wiper
424. oad to eliminate trailer sway Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop ona hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 6 approximate grade or greater hill Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK 480 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN WARNING There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for brak ing the vehicle Towing With H
425. ogrammed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks All Doors all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door is pro grammed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if 1st Press 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If Driver Door is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door s without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection press the Passive Entry button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle e Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob If Equipped This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location driver s seat exterior mirrors steering column position and radio station pre sets to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting
426. ol 186 Electronic Stability Control ESC 475 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 297 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 587 Hazard Warning Flasher 569 Jump Starting llle 583 Tow Hooks 0 0 eee 589 Emission Control System Maintenance 604 Engine Aur Cleaner 6 cone ake ee a et hae ae oe eis 611 Block Heater 0 000000 00000000 424 Break In Recommendations 108 Compartment 64 740 ev ead pawn ea eR eb 601 Compartment Identification 601 en INDEX 697 Coolant Antifreeze 2 0 200000 00 ee 669 Cooling seed ale bated Ra hare d 632 Exhaust Gas Caution l l 0000 109 Fails t Start sue ER dew Board ee aC Rd 422 Flooded Starting 4 RR Rd 422 Fuel Requirements lt sperone tarai prindea 527 Jump Starting 365 toemen aaga eeu pi 583 Oll cr edd demde eee ac aee n deed 607 Oil Fillet Cap ieu mm me d 609 Oil Selection i uda de pale yd Baha awd 608 Oil Synthetic ipsc ynan teiras reo 609 Overheatihg eccesso se e e mds 569 Statne e ns sce a d sce merus se kee Rd 419 Temperature Gauge llle 292 Engine Oil Viscosity llis 608 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart lesus 608 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 78 Entry System Illuminated 00 22 Ethanol s agp EE as hogy als Bear benteg e ay lege e 529 Event Data Recorder 0 00000 ce e
427. om the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The chime volume settings include LOW MEDIUM and HIGH The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ParkSense amp can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch Pya OFF When the ParkSense switch is pressed to disable the system the instrument cluster will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for approximately five seconds Refer to Driver Information Dis play DID in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the DID will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is disabled or requires service The ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled If the ParkSense switch is pressed and the system requires service the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily and then the LED will be ON Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System During vehicle start up when the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted condition the instru ment cl
428. on will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol e Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp the socket or the lamp wiring Front Fog Lamps 1 Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp connector 664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4 Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back of the front fog lamp housing 5 Insertthe bulb into the housing until the index tabs are engaged in the slots of the collar 6 Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are fully engaged 7 Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp connector Rear Tail Stop and Turn Signal Lamps 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Remove the two push pins from the tail lamp housing 3 Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to disengage the lamp from the aperture panel 073374396 Tail Lamp Push Pins 4 Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from lamp 0733003303 1 Rear Stop Lamp Bulb Socket 2 LED Tail Connector Do Not Remove 3 Rear Turn Signal Bulb Socket 5 Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket 6 Replace the bulb reinst
429. oper height based on the position of the Selec Terrain switch The height can be changed from the default Selec Terrain setting by normal use of the air suspension buttons Refer to Selec Terrain in Starting and Operating for further information The system requires that the engine be running for all changes When lowering the vehicle all of the doors including the liftgate must be closed If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will not be completed until the open door s is closed The Quadra Lift air suspension system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming traffic When raising the vehicle the rear of the vehicle will move up first and then the front When lowering the vehicle the front will move down first and then the rear After the engine is turned off it may be noticed that the air suspension system operates briefly this is normal The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance ee STARTING AND OPERATING 451 To assist with changing a spare tire the Quadra Lift air suspension system has a feature which allows the auto matic leveling to be disabled Refer to Uconnect Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling disabling of air suspension features must be done through the r
430. osition for typical installation instructions en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 Center Arm Rest Tether For rear facing child restraints secured in the center seat position with the vehicle seat belts the rear center seat position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in the upward position 1 To access the center seat arm rest tether first lower the arm rest The tether is located behind the armrest and hooked onto the plastic seat backing 022633125 m cam Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether 2 Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic seat backing 3 Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the strap located on the front of the arm rest 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To Install A LATCH Compatible Child Restraint If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat belt following the instructions below See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has 1 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages 2 Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to ge
431. ou need it Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts 464 STARTING AND OPERATING EBEN e After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation POWER STEERING 3 6L Engine Your vehicle is equipped with an electro hydraulic power steering
432. ouchscreen radio or by the rear seat occupants using the remote control Dual Video Screen NOTE Typically there are two different ways to operate the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System e The Remote Control The Touchscreen Radio If Equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361 Blu ray Disc Player To view a Blu ray insert the disc into the Blu ray Disc Player Playback will begin automatically after the Blu TM Play A Blu ray Disc ray Disc is recognized by the disc drive If playback The Blu ray Disc player is located in the center console does not begin automatically after the disc is inserted into Blu ray Disc Player follow these steps Using The Touchscreen Radio imams 17 of 24 1 21 04 2 28 43 repeat shuffle front media a 2008 o e full a lt OK gt e screen 1 v n H c ul gt listen in Blu ray Disc Player Location 0415042034 Rear Media Control Screen 362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee 1 RSE Channel 1 Mode Indicates the current source for Screen 1 Channel 1 This button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen Channel being controlled by the front user If this button is not highlighted select button to access controls for Screen 1 Channel 1 source 2 RSE Power Press to turn RSE On Off 3 RSE Mute Mute rear headphones for the current ignition cycle Pressing mute again will unmute rear headphones 4 R
433. our selection press the Sound Horn With Lock button on the touchscreen and select from Off 1st Press or 2nd Press Press the back arrow button on the touch screen to return to the previous menu e Horn wl Remote Start If Equipped When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection press the Horn w Remote Start button on the touchscreen and select from On or Off Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Remote Door Unlock When Remote Door Unlock is selected you may choose from Driver or All Select All to have all doors unlock with the first push of the Key Fob Select Driver to have the only the driver door open with the first push of the key fob NOTE Passive Entry If Equipped If All is selected all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry door handle is grasped If Driver is selected only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEM Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection press the Passive Entry button on the touch screen and select from On or Off Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Refer to Keyless Ent
434. our of manufacture The bar code that appears A the Release Cable bottom of the label is your VIN NOTE If the fuel door does not latch after the manual release cable has been activated the actuator latch should Grose Velucle Welent Rating te VR be manually returned to the closed position The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options and cargo The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded 540 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi cle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size Th
435. our radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an authorized dealer Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633 Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill CAUTION NOTE Some vehicles require special tools
436. p keep you in position away from inflating Side Air Bags To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child WARNING e Side Air Bags need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Continued 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued e Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions Side Air Bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags NOTE Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment Side Impacts In side impacts the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection In side impacts the Side Air Bags deploy independently a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
437. ped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature Press the En gine Off Power Delay button on the touchscreen and choose from 0 sec 45 sec 5 min or 10 min to select your desired time interval Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen e Auto Entry Exit If Equipped When this feature is selected it automatically lowers the vehicle ride height position when shifted into park Press the Auto Entry Exit button on the touchscreen and choose from On or Off Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Suspension If Equipped After pressing the Suspension button on the touch screen the following settings will be available e Auto Entry Exit Suspension When this feature is selected the vehicle automatically lowers from ride height position when vehicle shifted to park for easy entry exit To make your selection press the Auto Entry Exit button on the touchscreen select On or Off followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen e Display Suspension Messages When All is selected all the Air Suspension Alerts will be displayed When Warning Only is selected only the Air Suspension Warnings will be displayed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 e Tire Jack Mode When this feature is
438. peed CAUTION When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result e Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans mission shifting occurring EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks there will be one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle The rear hook will be located on the driver s side of the vehicle NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle WARNING Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury or death e Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps may become disengaged caus ing serious injury 590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EBENEN CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle MANUAL PARK RELEASE WARNING Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake before activating the Manual Park Release Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not s
439. per operation of the Fuel Saver Technology Refer to Fuel Saver Technology If Equipped in Starting and Oper ating for further information Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed 610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement fil
440. perating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was pushing the accelera tor and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be pros ecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in
441. personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets To remove per sonal information press the Clear Personal Data button and a pop up will appear asking Are you sure you want to clear all personal data select OK to Clear or Cancel to exit Once the data has been cleared a pop up appears stating Personal data cleared System Information After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e System Information When System Information is selected a System Information screen will appear displaying the system software version Uconnect RADIOS IF EQUIPPED For detailed information about your Uconnect radio refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates For further information refer to the Uconnect Supple ment Manual 358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Uconnect REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT RSE SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is designed to give your family years of enjoyment You can play your favorite CDs DVDs or Blu ray Discs listen to audio over the wireless headphones
442. ph 64 km h and 50 mph 80 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph 80 km h the vehicle will be automatically lowered to NRH Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in Starting and Operating for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 449 e Off Road 2 OR2 Raises the vehicle approximately 2 2 in 55 mm This position is intended for off roading use only where maximum ground clearance is required To enter OR2 push the Up button twice from the NRH position or once from the ORI position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph 32 km h While in OR2 if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph 40 km h the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to ORI Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in Starting and Operating for further information Aero Mode Lowers the vehicle approximately 0 6 in 15 mm This position provides improved aerody namics by lowering the vehicle The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 52 mph 83 km h and 56 mph 90 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 56 mph 90 km h The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains between 20 mph 32 km h and 25 mph 40 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 20 mph 32 km h The vehicle will enter Aero Mode regardless of vehicle speed if the shift lever is in the SPORT position Entry Exit Mo
443. plate steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the light and instrument panel lights are also turned on To turn off the headlights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Ww lenses 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch to the A AUTO position When the system is on the Headlight Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position To turn the automatic headlights off turn the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode Headlights On Automatically With Wipers If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights it also has this customer programmable feature When your headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is running they will automatically turn on when the wiper system is on This feature is programmable through the Uconnect system screen Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If your vehicle is equipped with a Rain Sensitive Wiper System and it is activated the headlights will automati cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe
444. ponent damage Driving In Snow Mud And Sand In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additional control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operating for further information Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control 462 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires WARNING If the engine stalls you lose forward motion or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may resul
445. possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system ee STARTING AND OPERATING 467 WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 468 STARTING AND OPERATING FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5 7L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED This f
446. pproved method of towing without the key fob is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle Two Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmis sion is operable the vehicle may be towed with rear wheels on the ground under the following conditions e The transmission must be in NEUTRAL Refer to Manual Park Release in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the engine is off The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles 48 km If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 30 miles 48 km tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground Accept able methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly or 596 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE when using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground CAUTION Towing faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 30 miles 48 km with rear wheels on the ground can cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty CAUTION
447. profile To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter refer to Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory in this section Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter NOTE Before programming your RKE transmitters you must select the Memory To FOB feature through the Uconnect system screen Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 To program your RKE transmitters perform the following 1 Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position 2 Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2 NOTE If a memory profile has not already been set refer to Programming The Memory Feature in this section for instructions on how to set a memory profile 3 Once the profile has been recalled press and release the SET S button on the memory switch 4 Within five seconds press and release button 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the instrument cluster 5 Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by pressing the SET S button and within 10 seconds followed by pressing the UNLOCK button on th
448. ption on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control 512 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporar
449. purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re subscribe Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U S residents only Restore Settings After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available Restore Settings When this feature is selected it will reset the Display Clock Audio and Radio Settings to their default settings To restore the settings to their default setting press the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen and pop up will appear asking Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default select OK to restore or Cancel to exit Once the settings are restored a pop up appears stating settings reset to default E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357 Clear Personal Data After pressing the Clear Personal Data Settings button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Clear Personal Data When this feature is selected it will remove
450. r Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market EE F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 687 MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Admin istrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian
451. r draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED There is a 115 Volt 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the back of the center console to convert DC current to AC current This outlet can power cellular phones electron ics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Play station4 and XBox One will exceed this power limit as will most new computers and power tools Power Inverter The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Do not insert any objects into the receptacles e Do not touch with wet hands e Close the lid when not in use e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CUPHOLDERS There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers There are two cuphold
452. r ee ce Rees 583 Key Fob Arm The Alarm x cues Ree RR ex es 20 Panic Alarm 2a rs Ro eva ER SER 25 Programming Additional Key Fobs 19 Programming Additional Transmitters 19 Unlock liftgate 2 5 cesa bred ReRESTXT 46 Key In Reminder sermesi ieena ia ae a a 16 Keyless Enter N Go 00 0000000004 36 Keyless Enter NGOM 2 2 0 36 Lock The Vehicle s Doors 00 326 Passive Entty ax R3 ee RES oos A 36 Passive Entry Programming 36 Unlock Liftgate llle 46 Keyless Entry System llle 22 Keyless GO sis xac sce ra ee SUR D ena RR 14 Key Replacement esed esse ex E ene e e 18 Keys sna 44 bie he aaah Mah GE ERE aci rs 14 en INDEX 701 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 17 Lane Change Assists 2 coge 334 9428 9340024984 176 Lap Shoulder Belts llle 53 Latches xc doeet Rh voe dur p Reese 113 Lead Pree Gasoline aa aigu ner rr tene era 527 Leaks Eid eca 9 ii E Rt P ee eet 113 Life of Dr S ccs rr ke n Rn 514 urcicl scakin cried a BAR ahah ae PA dea ty a eae UR chee 46 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 280 Light Bulbs iuste PROP E eels 112 Light 4 cn kk dee ERG RERO 112 AMD AG e iere ees iae er d Rex dcn ue 79 Anti bock uus erac dte eg es 9g er s 290 Automatic Headlights 0 168 Back Up ia sospes enami agi ance dant 664 Brake Assist Warning 0005 490 Brake Warning 3 ied cs a heb penie ss 29
453. r light could mean you will not have 9 1 1 Call services If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated have an authorized dealer service the 9 1 1 Call system immediately The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi nated the air bag system may not be working properly and the 9 1 1 system may not be able to send a signal to a 9 1 1 operator If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated have an authorized dealer service the ORC system immediately Even if the 9 1 1 Call system is fully functional factors beyond Chrysler Group LLC s control may prevent or stop the 9 1 1 Call system operation These include but are not limited to the following factors The ignition key has been removed from the ignition and the delayed accessories mode is active The ignition key is in OFF position The vehicle s electrical systems are not intact The 9 1 1 Call system software and or hardware are damaged during a crash The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon nected during a vehicle crash Wireless and or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed e Equipment malfunction at the 9 1 1 operator facility ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Operator error by the 9 1 1 operator Wireless network congestion e Weather e Bui
454. r near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate e Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Continued WARNING Continued e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Advanced Front Air Bag Operation Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts Ad vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Ad vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that p
455. r rear facing child restraint Two types of child restraints can be used rear facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rear facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rear facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rear facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rear facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and con vertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown t
456. r transmission Transfer Case Single Speed Quadra Trac I8 We recommend you use Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353 Transfer Case Two Speed Quadra Trac II amp We recommend you use MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Axle Differential Front We recommend you use MOPAR GL 5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 85 Axle Differential Rear With Electronic Limited Slip Differential ELSD We recommend you use MOPAR GL 5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 85 with friction modifier additive Axle Differential Rear Without Electronic Limited Slip Differential ELSD We recommend you use MOPAR GL 5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 85 672 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Power Steering Reservoir 3 6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Hydraulic Fluid Power Steering Reservoir 5 7L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 or MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 674 Maintenance Chart 0 00000 5 M A l N T E N A N c E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N o E S C H E D
457. r vehicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path 476 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indi cator Light begins to flash during acceler
458. rable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size NOTE prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire sensor to become inoperable After using an after failure or condition market tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Continued 522 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes Premium System the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte readings to the Receiver Module nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain
459. rake jerk warning If the driver does not take action based upon these progres sive warnings then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required BRAKE 0323001258 FCW Message When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable the warning message will be deactivated 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN NOTE e The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph 8 km h The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality It is unsafe to test the FCW system To prevent such misuse of the system after four Active Braking events within a key cycle the Active Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next key cycle The FCW system is intended for on road use only If the vehicle is taken off road the FCW system should be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surroundings If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range the FCW system will be automatically deactivated WARNING
460. re once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the instrument cluster will display PARKSENSE OFF for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE ParkSense when on will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia bumper 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN e Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense CAUTION system off if objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc are placed within 12 in 30 cm from the e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to rear fascia bumper Failure to do so can result in the recognize every obstacle including small obstacles system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not problem causing the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE detected at all Obstacles located above or below SERVICE REQUIRED message to be displayed in the the sensors will not be
461. rea Heater Diesel F64 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors Powertrain F66 10 Amp Red Sunroof Passenger Window Switches Rain Sensor F67 15 Amp Blue CD DVD Bluetooth Hands free Module If Equipped F68 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper Motor F69 15 Amp Blue Spotlight Feed If Equipped F70 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor F71 30 Amp Green Audio Amplifier F73 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamp RH If Equipped F74 20 Amp Yellow Brake Vacuum Pump If Equipped F76 10 Amp Red Anti lock Brakes Electronic Stability Control 656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F77 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module Front Axle Disconnect Module F78 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module Electric Power Steering If Equipped F80 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener Compass Anti Intrusion Module F81 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn Stop Lights F82 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module Cruise Control F83 i 10 Amp Red Fuel Door F84 15 Amp Blue Switch Bank Instrument Cluster F85 i 10 Amp Red Airbag Module F86 10 Amp Red Airbag Module F87 10 Amp Red Air Suspension If Equipped Trailer Tow Steering Column Control Module F88 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F90 F91 20 Amp Yellow Po
462. rease in set speed is re flected in the DID NOTE e When you override and push the SET button or SET buttons the new Set Speed will be the current speed of the vehicle When you use the SET button to decelerate if the engine s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop when following a target vehicle If an ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill the host vehicle will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after com ing to a full stop ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill However a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending down hill This is normal operation and necessary to main tain set speed When driving up hill and down hill the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range overheated Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars longest three bars long two bars medium and one bar short Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displays in the DID Distance Setting
463. reen to return to the previous menu e Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the Speed Adjusted Volume button on the touch screen and select from Off 1 2 or 3 buttons on the touchscreen Press the back arrow Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Surround Sound If Equipped This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection press the Surround Sound button on the touchscreen select On or Off Press the back arrow Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e AUX Volume Offset If Equipped This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input To make your selection press the AUX Volume Offset button on the touchscreen select On or Off Press the back arrow Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee e Loudness If Equipped This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes To make your selection press the Loudness button on the touchscreen select On or Off Press the back arrow Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Phone Bluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available
464. reflected in the DID Metric Speed kmlh Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km h e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the DID To Decrease Speed While ACC is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing the SET button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph e Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is re flected in the DID Metric Speed kmlh Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km h If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km h increments until the button is released The dec
465. require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor TL 2 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button while you push and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indi cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained 4 Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you are programming Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed To program the two remaining HomeLink but
466. road condi tions Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your ve hicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury The ACC system Does not react to pedestrians oncoming vehicles and stationary objects e g a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Cannot take street traffic and weather condi You should switch off the ACC system tions into account and may be limited upon e When driving in fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet adverse sight distance conditions heavy traffic and complex driving situations i e Does not always fully recognize complex driving in highway construction zones conditions which can result in wrong or missing e When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp distance warnings when driving on roads that are winding icy snow Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while covered slippery or have steep uphill or downhill following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle slopes for 2 seconds in the stop position If the target e When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes vehicle does not start moving within two seconds e When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a the ACC system will display a message that the constant speed system will release the brakes and t
467. roduce a severe initial deceleration Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger and position the front occu pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags WARNING Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mo
468. rogrammed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys tem serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho rized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors liftgate and ignition for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the interior switches for door locks and power liftgate are disabled The Vehicle Secu rity Alarm provides both audio and visual signals the horn will sound the headlights will turn on park lamps and or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three min utes If the disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE The Panic and Se
469. rom 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the or button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Auto EntrylExit Suspension If Equipped When this feature is selected the driver can choose to automatically lower the vehicle from ride height position when the vehicle is shifted to park To change the mode status press the Auto Entry Exit Suspension button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Suspension If Equipped After pressing the Suspension button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Auto Entry Exit Suspension When this feature is selected the vehicle lowers the suspension for easy entry exit Press the Auto Entry Exit Suspension button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353 the check mark is removed showing the system has been deacti
470. rosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area immediately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Proce dures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Continued 616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive 4 and negative and are identified on the battery Continued CAUTION Continued case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your a
471. rt e Tum A C on and set the mode control to the position o Cool Sunny Operate in o position Cool amp Humid conditions 06 64 Set the mode control to xf and tum on A C to keep 656696 66 i c windows clear Set the mode control to the position If windshield id Weather Co eathe fogging starts to occur move the control towards the M position 0456052237 n UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395 Uconnect VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS Key Features Introducing Uconnect e 5 touchscreen Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful e Three buttons on either side of the display quick tips It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5 0 or 8 4A 8 4AN system Top 40 95 5 1 WKQI FM Detroit s Hit Music y Channel Uconnect 8 4AN Uconnect 5 0 396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MMM If you see the icon on your touchscreen you have the Uconnect 8 4AN system If not you have a Uconnect 8 4A system Get Started All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel 1 Visit UconnectPhone com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pair ing instructions Reduce background noise Wind and passenger con versations are examples of noise that may impact recognition 3 Speak cl
472. rust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 that al lows extended maintenance intervals This engine cool ant antifreeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km before replacement To pre vent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 90032 When adding engine coolant antifreeze e We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 90032 Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 90032 and distilled water Use higher concen trations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635 Use only high purity water
473. s 3 There are tether strap anchorages behind each E rear seating position located on the back of the seat To access them pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back this will expose the top tether strap anchorages THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 022633426 Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap Anchorage 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee rear facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage Center Seat LATCH WARNING Do not install a child restraint in the center posi tion using the LATCH system This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments You must use the seat belt Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Strap Anchorage LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be e Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side than one child restraint Please refer to Installing Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating p
474. s Ce es vds 255 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 184 MWindOWS casses peadega sa RE PER es A1 Power Steering Fluid llle sss 671 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 60 Preparation for Jacking reiasa aaeeea es 574 Pretensioners Seat Belts PLU 60 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 22 Quadra Lift 52r Rd Re n Y 447 Quadra Trae i em an Resort Be a Sere 438 Radial Ply Tires 0 0 00 00 0000 ees 507 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 635 Radio Operation 1 2 6 eee 380 Radio Remote Controls 200005 378 Radio Sound Systems 000 357 Rain Sensitive Wiper System sess 181 Rear Axle Differential 000 640 Rear Camera 244 a eee eee aes eens ea E 241 Rear Cross Path 140 Rear Cuphold t 2 sue he ct RR ORG 270 Rear ParkSense System 0 66 ems 6004 eee 223 Rear Seat Folding secs tgn E 158 ee INDEX 705 Rear Window Features 00000 cease 280 Rear Wiper Washer 0 00000 0000 eee eee 280 Reclining Front Seats i3 i428 4 06a6 e630 94 ene 148 Recorder Event Data 0 0 00 eee 82 Recreational Towing 00 0000 eeu 557 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 561 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 444 Reformulated Gasoline lees 528 R frigerant cete ge pe ated pues d ea a 617 Reminder Seat Belt 0 00002 eee eae 52 Remote Contro
475. s and follow the system prompts settings v7 vA Gd Cimate Na pi Uconnect 8 4A 8 4AN Phone Voice Text Reply hone 0415029594 Media Controis Uconnect will announce incoming text messages Push the Phone button w and say Listen Must have com patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system PRE DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES Yes Stuck in Traffic See you later No meane w ign II be Late me Okay Where are you I will be lt num Are you there ber gt minutes Call me yet late I ll call you I need See you in later directions number of I m on my way Can t talk right minutes I m lost now Thanks 404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se TIP Your mobile phone must have the full implementa tion of the Message Access Profile MAP to take advan tage of this feature For details about MAD visit UconnectPhone com Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only Climate 8 4A 8 4AN Too hot Too cold Adjust vehicle temperatures hands free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead If vehicle is equipped with climate control Push the VR button VR After the beep say one of the following commands e Set driver temperature to 70 degrees e Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees TIP Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle Voice Comman
476. s are harmful to the environment You can dispose of them either in the correct containers as specified by law or by taking them to a Dealership which will deal with their disposal Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand Insert the tip of the emergency key or a 2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 0213004940 This device may not cause harmful interference Separating RKE Transmitter Case Remove the battery by turning the back cover over battery facing downward and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar then replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved on the battery to the
477. s using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants 618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf If Equipped HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro fluorocarbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmen tal Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product with a low GWP Global Warming Potential However the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants Air Conditioning Filter Replacement A C Air Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the ignition is in the ON RUN position or personal injury may result Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove compartment Perform the following procedure to replace the filter 1 Open the glove compartment and remove all contents MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619 2 There are glove compartment travel stops on both sides of the glove compartment door partially close the glove compartment door and push inward to release the glove compartment tr
478. se Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed Once a speed has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH km h will appear indicating what speed was set A CRUISE indicator lamp along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with out erasing the set speed from memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the SET button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph If the button is continually pressed the set speed will con
479. selected the air suspension system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension while the vehicle is on a jack changing a tire To make your selection press the Tire Jack Mode button on the touchscreen select On or Off followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen e Transport Mode When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing To make your selection press the Transport Mode button on the touchscreen select On or Off followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen e Wheel Alignment Mode This feature prevents auto leveling of the air suspension while performing a wheel alignment service Before per forming a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled Refer to your authorized dealer for further information Compass Settings If Equipped After pressing the Compass Settings button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differ ences and provide the most accurate compass heading 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mMm NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s
480. serious injury or death cally This is called Express Open During Express In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could will stop the sunroof also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are also properly secured Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and
481. set of desired radio station presets Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE trans mitters one RKE transmitter can be linked to memory position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to memory position 2 The memory seat switch is located on the driver s door trim panel The switch consists of three buttons e The S button which is used to activate the memory save function e The 1 and 2 buttons which are used to recall either of two pre programmed memory profiles Memory Seat Switch 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Programming The Memory Feature NOTE To create a new memory profile perform the following 1 Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences i e seat side mirror power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio station pre sets 3 Press and release the S Set button on the memory switch 4 Within five seconds press and release either of the memory buttons 1 or 2 The Driver Information Display DID will display which memory position has been set NOTE e Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
482. severe usage such as trailer towing If this telltale turns on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEU TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off e Service Forward Collision Warming If Equipped This light warns the driver of a potential colli sion with the vehicle in front and prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the collision For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 e Service Adaptive Cruise Control If Equipped This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service For further infor mation refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle DID Red Telltales This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar Oil Pressure Warning Light R77 This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood Oil Temperature Warning Light T
483. sh a ground connection and personal or the discharged vehicle injury could result NOTE Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle while making connections 586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EBENEN Connecting The Jumper Cables WARNING Continued 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the could result in personal injury Only use the specific remote positive post of the discharged vehicle ground point do not use any other exposed metal 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper Parts cable to the positive 4 post of the booster battery 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then negative post of the booster battery start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper DAMENY cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with 6 Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables the discharged battery in the reverse sequence WARNING Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 1 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative from the remote negative post of the discharged post of the discharged battery The resulting electri vehicle cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
484. sing the two fasteners slots on one side of the vehicle NOTE Some alignment may be required upon fascia 3 Return to the center of the vehicle and repeat Step 2 to installation to align sensor with fascia the opposite side of the vehicle 4 Install the wiring harness connector into the radar NOTE SEED It may be necessary to apply additional force to NOTE If you receive a fault see your authorized dealer individual tabs to make sure they are fully engaged they may need to perform a sensor alignment e Do not use any tools to apply additional force to the Lower Front Fascia Installation This will only work if tabs as damage to the upper and lower fascias may you have a helper We suggest result 1 Starting at the center of the vehicle engage a sufficient 4 Reinstall the seven quarter turn fasteners number of tabs to support the weight of the lower fascia typically one or two tabs into the upper fascia ee STARTING AND OPERATING 459 Quadra Lift If Equipped When off roading it is recommended that the lowest useable vehicle height that will clear the current obstacle or terrain be selected The vehicle height should then be raised as required by the changes in terrain The Selec Terrain switch will automatically change the vehicle to the optimized height based on the Selec Terrain switch position The vehicle height can be changed from the default height for each Selec Terrain mode by normal use of t
485. sonal injury steering wheel and the following will display in the DID ACC SET When ACC is set the set speed will display in the instrument cluster Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The DID displays the current ACC system settings The DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster The information it displays depends on ACC system status The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC ON activity occurs which may include any of the following OFF button located on the steering wheel until one of e System Cancel the following displays in the DID Adaptive Cruise Control Off When ACC is deactivated the display will read Adap tive Cruise Control Off Driver Override e System Off e ACC Proximity Warning en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 e ACC Unavailable Warning The DID will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity Display Warnings And Maintenance Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning The ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance This most often occurs at times of poor visibility such as in snow or heavy rain The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions such as mud dirt or ice In these cases the DID will display ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe
486. splay DID the DID will indicate when the washer fluid level is low When the sensor detects a low fluid level the wind shield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and the WASHER FLUID LOW message will be displayed The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solu tion or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex
487. splay on Rear 1 and can be heard on Rear 1 Selecting a video source on Rear 2 the video source will display on Rear 2 and can be heard on Rear 2 Audio can be heard through the headphones even when the screen s are closed UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367 Blu ray Disc Player Remote Control If Controls And Indicators Equipped 1 Power Turns the screen and wireless headphone transmitter for the selected Channel on or off To hear audio while the screen is closed push the Power button to turn the headphone transmitter on 2 Channel Selector Indicators When a button is pushed the currently affected channel or channel button is illuminated momentarily 3 SOURCE Push to enter Source Selection screen 4 Channel Screen Selector Switch Indicates which channel is being controlled by the remote control When the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position the Blu ray Player Remote Control remote controls the functionality of headphone Chan nel 1 left screen When the selector switch is in the Rear 2 position the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 2 right screen 044874416 5 gt Push to navigate menus 368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 SETUP Push to access the screen settings menu gt P Push and hold to fast forward through the current audio track or video chapter gt Play Pause
488. start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive above can reach higher temperatures than in normal normally and will not require towing operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry CAUTION plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator or serious injury to the driver occupants or others Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine 11 Temperature Gauge control system It also could affect fuel economy and driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
489. stment Lift WARNING upward on the head restraint to raise it or push down ward on the head restraint to lower it Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision Always make sure the outboard head re straints are in their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied NOTE For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information 030933142 Rear Head Restraint 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 60 40 Split Rear Seat To Lower Rear Seat Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room NOTE Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seatback to fold down easily 1 Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat 030909670 Rear Seat Release NOTE e Do not fold the 60 rear seat down with the left outboard or rear center seat belt buckled Do not fold the 40 rear seat down with the right outboard seat belt buckled Rear Seat Folded 030909671 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3159 To Raise Rear Seat Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
490. such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE e Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recom mended and can result in cooling system damage If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency have a authorized dealer drain flush and refill with OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 as soon as possible Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces 636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN WARNING Do not open hot engine cooling system Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool a
491. sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements WARNING An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in a collision Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information mmm s STARTING AND OPERATING 545 Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium Duty 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy Duty 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Max
492. t Jacks 364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Audio Video RCA HDMI Jacks AUX HDMI Jacks on the side of each seat enable the monitor to display video directly from a video camera connect video games for display on the screen or play music directly from an MP3 player When connecting an external source to the AUX HDMI input ensure to follow the standard color coding for the audio video jacks 1 HDMI Input 2 Right audio in red 3 Left audio in white 4 Video in yellow NOTE Certain high end video games such as Playsta tion4 and XBox One will exceed this power limit of the vehicle s Power Inverter Play A DVD Blu ray Disc Using The Touchscreen Radio 1 Insert the DVD Blu ray Disc with the label facing as indicated on the DVD Blu ray Disc player The radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts playing the first track 2 To watch a DVD Blu ray Disc on Rear 1 driver side rear passenger ensure the Remote Control and Head phone channel selector switch is on Rear 1 3 To watch a DVD Blu ray Disc on Rear 2 passenger side rear passenger ensure the Remote Control and Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 2 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365 Using The Remote Control Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls 1 Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control 1 Press the Media button on the Uconnect radio touch
493. t Seema eae aa M IDE MN 83 ecd o ae aa aan NEM 24 Transporting Pets sss 06 4 24220 se 108 E KEYLESS ENTERN GO L L LL LLL 36 ll ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 108 B WINDOWS 4 usc ikx hs ether EYED acd A1 BSEC THU Phos ddfiacippsohng ducti 103 Power dE E 41 Transporting Passengers sess 109 Wind Buffeing cu ex werk Eee PIE 45 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Exhaust Gas i4 bona ek wee m eas 109 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Outside The Vehicle 112 Vehicle 2x deste eee dug en 110 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node KIN Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion Keyless Ignition Node KIN This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment The Keyless Ignition Node KIN has four operating positions three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position The three positions are OFF ACC
494. t a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu facturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 3 Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat ing position If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether anchor Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could
495. t button once to choose HIGH e Press the ventilated seat button S a second time to choose LOW e Press the ventilated seat button S a third time to turn the ventilated seat OFF ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 NOTE The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system Refer to Uconnect Settings in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Active Head Restraints Front Seats Active Head Restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspection of the head r
496. t in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back care fully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake Remember never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb ee STARTING AND OPERATING 463 Traction Downhill When descending mountains or hills use Hill Descent or Selec Speed Control to avoid repeated heavy braking If not equipped with Hill Descent or Selec Speed Control use the following procedure Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into 4WD LOW range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion whenever possible After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when y
497. t is selected for the Display Mode the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on e Display Brightness With Headlights ON When in this display you may select the overall screen brightness with the headlights on Adjust the brightness with the and setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the and buttons on the touchscreen Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen NOTE To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights ON setting the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions Display Brightness With Headlights OFF When in this display you may select the overall screen brightness with the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the and buttons on the touchscreen Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen NOTE To make changes to the Display Brightness with Headlights OFF setting the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or parade positions E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 e Set Language When in this display you may select one of multiple languages English Frangais Espatiol for all d
498. t the system is operational The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft 3 8 m The zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 10 ft 3 m beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de tection zones The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects
499. tain cold conditions ice may prevent the fuel door from opening If this occurs lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup and re release the fuel door using the inside release button Do not pry on the door Fuel Filler Door Release Switch 2 Open the fuel filler door ee STARTING AND OPERATING 537 3 There is no fuel filler cap A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system 4 Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel ing 5 Fill the vehicle with fuel when the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 6 Wait 5 seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle 7 Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door Emergency Gas Can Refueling Most gas cans will not open the flapper door e A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow emergency refueling with a gas can Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel nozzle Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door open Pour fuel into funnel opening Remove funnel from filler pipe clean off prior to putting back in the spare tire storage area CAUTION To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling 538 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN WARNING Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle w
500. talled in the center No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages use the seat belt to in stall a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchor ages in an outboard position Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child restraint owner s manual for more information Can the head restraints be removed Yes The head restraints may be removed in the center seating position only 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are e found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback below the anchorage sym bols on the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion LATCH Anchorages Jj 022636667 Locating The Tether Anchorage
501. tch past the first detent release and the window will go 021874405 Auto Down Window Switches ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Auto Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection Driver And Front Passenger Door Only Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop Auto Up Window Switches 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during Resetting The Auto Up Feature Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road condi tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window during Auto Up If this happens pull the switch lightly to completely and continue to hold the switch up for an the first detent and hold it to close the window manually additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second WARNING detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the after th
502. te 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MMM Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks button on the touch screen the following settings will be available e Auto Door Locks When this feature is selected all doors will lock auto matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press the Auto Door Locks button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate e Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press the Auto Unlock on Exit button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate e Flash Lights With Lock When this feature is selected the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or when using the passive entry feature This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press the Flash Lights with Lock button on
503. tem will return to AUTO NOTE Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed Control for steep downhill control See Electronic Brake Control System in this section for further information Driver Information Display DID Messages When the appropriate conditions exist a message will appear in the DID display Refer to Driver Information Display DID in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information QUADRA LIFT IF EQUIPPED Description The Quadra Lift air suspension system provides full time load leveling capability along with the benefit of vehicle height adjustment by the push of a button 448 STARTING AND OPERATING 0582003300 Selec Terrain Switch 1 Up Button 2 Down Button 3 Entry Exit Mode Indicator Lamp Customer Selectable 4 Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp Customer Selectable 5 Off Road 1 Indicator Lamp Customer Selectable 6 Off Road 2 Indicator Lamp Customer Selectable Normal Ride Height NRH This is the standard position of the suspension and is meant for normal driving Off Road 1 OR1 Raises the vehicle approximately 1 1 in 28 mm This is the primary position for all off road driving until OR2 is needed A smoother and more comfortable ride will result Push the Up button once from the NRH position while the vehicle speed is below 38 mph 61 km h When in the OR1 position if the vehicle speed remains between 40 m
504. tem adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EBENEN CAUTION WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Proper lug nut bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer i remains on HOT H and you hear continuous Torque Specifications chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service Lug Nut Bolt Torque Lug Nut Lug Nut Bolt Size Bolt Socket Size I m WARNING 130 Ft Lbs 176 N m M14 x 1 50 22 mm You or others can be badly burned by hot engine U ly Chrysl l l coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If ee clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open
505. tem function and operating information To make your selection press the Hill Start Assist button on the touchscreen and make your selection Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Lights After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 e Headlights Off Delay When this feature is selected it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off To change the Headlights Off Delay setting press the Headlight Off Delay button on the touchscreen and choose either 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec or 90 seconds Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu Headlight Illumination On Approach When this feature is selected it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status press the Illuminated Approach button and choose either 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec or 90 seconds Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Headlights With Wipers If Equipped When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn of
506. ters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom mended Gasoline Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and Replacement Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris if you find evidence of either dirt or debris you should change your air cleaner filter 612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal 2 Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter 1 Release the spring clips from the air cleaner cover
507. the Hazard Warning flasher NOTE To assist with changing a spare tire the air 3 Set the parking brake suspension system has a feature which allows the auto 4 Place the shift lever into PARK matic leveling to be disabled 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or Due ee aeration CIE slippery surfaces WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally Jacking Instructions opposite of the jacking position For example if changing the right front WARNING tire block the left rear wheel R Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle 060505162 NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 7 For vehicles equipped with Quadra Lift refer to e Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to Quadra Lift amp If Equipped in Starting And Op be raised erating for further information on disabling auto e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic matic leveling transmission in PARK e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued 576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Continued Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get
508. the NEUTRAL N light stays on release the NEUTRAL N button 7 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 8 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 444 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met a To Tow Vehicle Safely Read Neutral Shift Procedure in Own ers Manual message will flash from the Driver Informa tion Display DID Refer to Driver Information Display DID in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Start the engine 4 Press and hold the brake pedal 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 6 Using a ballpoint pen or similar object push and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL N button lo cated by the selector switch for one second 0582003302 NEUTRAL N Switch 7 When the NEUTRAL N indicator light turns off release the NEUTRAL N button ee STARTING AND OPERATING 445 8 After the NEUTRAL N button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch Quadra Drive Il System If Equipped The optional Quadra Drive II System features two torque transfer couplings The couplings include an Electronic Limited Slip Differential ELSD rear axle and the
509. the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position from the OFF position NOTE The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the power liftgate remote start your vehicle if equipped or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fo
510. the blower level will increase Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting 6 Rear Defrost Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water e Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MMM 7 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature sett
511. the hood until the radiator has had time Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot 0605005441 Wheel Mounting Surface Tighten the lug nuts bolts in a star pattern until each nut bolt has been tightened twice After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts bolts are properly seated against the wheel WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571 0605006372 Torque Patterns WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EBEN J ACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Continued WARNING Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the The jack is designed to be used as a tool for vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the j
512. the sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it NOTE e If the ACC FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor message occurs frequently e g more than once on every trip without any snow rain mud or other obstruction have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer Installing a snow plow front end protector an after market grille or modifying the grille is not recom mended Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC FCW operation ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 Clean Front Windshield Warning The ACC FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system per formance This most often occurs at times of poor visibil ity such as in snow or heavy rain and fog The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions such as mud dirt or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass In these cases the DID will display ACC FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield and the system will have degraded perfor mance The ACC FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield message can sometimes be disp
513. the touchscreen then the Safety amp Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen Press the Parkview Backup camera Delay button on the touch screen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or OFF e Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press the Rain Sensing button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting had been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu e Hill Start Assist If Equipped When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection press the Hill Start Assist button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting indicating that the setting had been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mMm Lights After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected it allows adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off To change the Headlights Off Delay setting press the or
514. the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle 516 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN WARNING WARNING Continued Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Continued e Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire fai
515. the vehicle To make your selection press the Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 e Power Lift Gate Chime If Equipped This feature plays an alert when the power lift gate is raising or lowering To make your selection press the Power Lift Gate Chime button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate Auto On Comfort If Equipped After pressing the Auto On Comfort button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available e Auto On Driver Heated Ventilated Seat amp Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C When temperatur
516. the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch receiver The following table shows the approxi mate distances for each zone Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 1 ft 0 30 cm Yellow 1 ft 6 5 ft 30 cm 2 m Green 6 5 ft or greater 2 m or greater ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 WARNING CAUTION Drivers must be careful when backing up even when To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Always be used as a parking aid The Park View camera is check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob drive path structions or blind spots before backing up You are To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be responsible for the safety of your surroundings and driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to must continue to pay attention while backing up stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft c
517. ting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Re verse position NOTE The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned on when delivered from the factory The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System Refer to Uconnect Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors To access an illuminated vanity mirror flip down one of the visors Lift the cover to reveal the mirror The light will turn on automatically 030409524 Illuminated Vanity Mirror 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature If Equipped The sun visor Slide On Rod feature allows for addi tional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun 1 Fold down the sun visor 2 Unclip the visor from the center clip 3 Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to extend it BLIND SPOT MONITORING BSM IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle 0304052885 Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know tha
518. tinue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km h e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Decrease Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can de crease speed by pushing the SET button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed km h e Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km h e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then
519. tion DID will display ACC Push the ENGINE START STOP button a second time to place the ignition to the RUN position DID will display ON RUN e Push the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF position DID will display OFF Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 423 WARNING Continued E oo EMI ENGINE Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter 1 Press and hold the brake pedal If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel and vehicle e If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster 2 Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
520. tion pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals 498 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Term Definition Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure Pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi cle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures STARTING AND OPERATING 499 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door l Z 054901778 Example Tire Placard Location Door 500 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire And Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF qu anos AE SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR TIRE FRONT SPARE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE P395 0R14 P195 70R14 T125 70015 COLD TIRE SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 Number of people that
521. tions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Engine Oil Viscosity 3 6L Engine MOPAR SAE 5W 20 engine oil approved to Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 such as Pennzoil Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609 NOTE MOPAR SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 such as Pennzoil Shell Helix or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil meeting MS 6395 is not available Engine Oil Viscosity 5 7L Engine MOPAR SAE 5W 20 engine oil or equivalent such as Pennzoil or Shell Helix is recommended for all oper ating temperatures This engine oil improves low tem perature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in impro
522. to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains ant is different and should not be mixed with visible sediment have an authorized dealer clean and Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en flush with OAT coolant antifreeze conforming to gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat MS 90032 ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency the cooling system will need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh Selection Of Coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an au Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in thorized dealer as soon as possible Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Continued 6034 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or anti
523. to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment A low energy output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags WARNING e No objects should be placed over o
524. to the tow dolly 3 Firmly apply the parking brake Shift the transmission into PARK en STARTING AND OPERATING 559 4 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 5 Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 6 Install a suitable clamping device designed for tow ing to secure the front wheels in the straight position CAUTION Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Recreational Towing Quadra Trac 1 Single Speed Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Models Recreational towing is not allowed These models do not have a NEUTRAL N position in the transfer case NOTE This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 560 STARTING AND OPERATING es Recreational Towing Quadra Trac II Quadra Drive Il Four Wheel Drive Models CAUTION Continued Tow only in a forward direction Towing this ve hicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case The transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing Before recreational towing perform the
525. to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery The HomeLink buttons located on the overhead con sole designate the three different HomeLink channels The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN ES position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes NOTE 034033576 e Frasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons HomeLink Buttons Overhead Consoles NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active A e f you have any problems or require assistance please Before You Begin Programming HomeLink call toll free vocum id on the m at Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage HomeLink com for information or assistance before you begin programming 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Progr
526. tons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Canadian Gate Operator To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink To operate push and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming
527. tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a mal function in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc tion is detected that could affect the air bag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately
528. ts will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection press the Auto High Beams button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate Refer to Lights Automatic High Beam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lights If Equipped When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the vehicle is set in motion To make your selection press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate e Flash Lights With Lock When this feature is selected the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press the Flash Lights with Lock button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or push the back button on the facepla
529. ts require removal see your autho rized dealer In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the opera tion of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed Head Restraints Rear Seats The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjust able They automatically fold forward when the rear seat is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their normal position when the rear seat is raised After returning either seat to its upright position raise the head restraint until it locks in place The outboard head restraints are not removable UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 The center head restraint has limited adju
530. turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off imme diately and call an authorized dealer for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap para graph 12 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop 294 UNDERS
531. u could lose control of the vehicle and hit dipstick tube someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is e 5 7L Engine Bundled and fastened to the injector firmly pressing the brake pedal harness Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 425 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the number of reasons A child or others could be parking brake shift the transmission into PARK seriously or fatally injured Children should be turn the engine OFE and remove the Key Fob warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal When the ignition is in the OFF position the or the transmission gear selector transmission is locked in PARK securing the ve Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or hicle against unwanted movement in a location accessible to children and do not When leaving the vehicle always make sure the leave the ignition in the ACC or ON RUN position ignition is in the OFF position remove the key fob A child could operate power windows other con from the vehicle and lock the vehicle trols or move the vehicle
532. ual contains WARNINGS against oper ating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on a plate located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also is stamped into the right front body behind the right front seat Move the right front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped VIN This number also appears on the Automobile Infor mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment VIN Location 010809610 INTRODUCTION 9 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS ey m Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death pm Right Front Body VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 14 Keyless Ignition Node KIN 14 Key BOD socio dene
533. uchscreen Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons 11 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets and demist outlets The Mode settings are as follows Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individu ally adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets e Bi Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demis ter outlets NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets e Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets e Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions 388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 12 Climate Control OFF Button
534. ue for the entire duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are buckled The driver should instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts If an outboard front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 MPH 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat if equipped in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho rized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert NOTE If BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or outboard front passenger s if equipped with BeltAlert seat belt remains unbuckled Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoul
535. uld be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPARQ Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition 648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm CAUTION Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol based and or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats as damage to the seat may result Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break age than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commer
536. unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion 030933466 This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting Fold Flat Passenger Seat in a seat that has been overheated could cause Heated Seats If Equipped serious burns due to the increased surface tempera ture of the seat On some models the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and seat backs 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Front Heated Seats The front heated seats control buttons are located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen e Press the heated seat button s once to turn the HIGH setting ON e Press the heated seat button dif a second time to turn the LOW setting ON e Press the heated seat button di a third time to turn the heating elements OFF If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HIGH to LOW indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automati c
537. under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground A E d Jack Warning Label CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the spare tire jack and tools from storage 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools Jack And Tool Assembly 4 For the front axle place the jack on the body flange just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged 060641337 Jacking Locations 578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 060637589 060641341 Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding Front Jacking Location 5 For a rear tire place the jack in the slot on the rear tie down bracket just forward of the rear tire as indicated by the triangular lift point sym
538. unted in the instrument panel below the steering column The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts pretensioners and Advanced Front Air Bags Supplemental Side Air Bags Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags 1 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SABs Located in the outboard side of the front seats The SABs are marked with SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the seats Z 4022610242 Front Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impact and certain rollover events in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure When the SAB deploys it opens the seam on the out board side of the seatback s trim cover ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects
539. ur Brakes es e samga iaaa 00000000004 471 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 472 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Control 191 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreze 634 Adding Fuel 5er eR ERE ees 536 Additives Fuel 00 00 eee eee eee 530 AID Dag 3 opt been eid Ace T RES Poe d 67 Air Bag Advance Front Air Bag sees sgass eee 68 Air Bag Components sse berries enri aeaa 67 Air bag Operation miah E iA 70 Air Bag Warning Light 79 Driver Knee Air Bag sice areia aesa a a 72 Enhanced Accident Response 78 Event Data Recorder EDR 82 Front Air Bag eese eo n re es 67 If A Deployment Occurs ssu sesa ter manisa sas 77 Knee Impact Bolsters 00004 71 Maintaining Your Air Bag System 81 Side Air Bags ec Ree ee ea 72 Transporting Pete 4 se Re eke aes 108 Air bag Deployment sectes ss dbe llis 67 Air bag Light vh Rete weg eae ada Rs 79 Air bag Maintenance lille 81 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 611 Air Conditioner Maintenance llle 616 Air Conditioning Filter llle 393 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 392 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 616 Air Conditioning System 6 0 2 000 000 390 Air Pressure Tires 0 0 0 0 ee ee 506 Air SUSPENSION 6 a hore a do cepe er BH cen dep BS 447 Alarm Arm The System sogi aae GANE nE e
540. ure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued WARNING Continued Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were o
541. uster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or the PARKSENSE UNAVAIL ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message Refer to Driver Information Display DID for further information When the shift lever gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition the DID will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE QUIRED message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN SORS appears in the Driver Information Display DID make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED appears in the DID see an authorized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense amp System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense amp System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system oper ating properly Jackhammers large trucks
542. ut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 7 4 iO Iglo i ED m I ELECTRONIC STABILITY ii t p i i i i du E Y O T i amp i i x s Di i i f 3 i i E A Dp iw EI i Nc CO t 8 2 i f i 1910 cS H D ie ima la im TI i i i i i i i i i i i i HEATED i q EI Ju IS de 18 t jor S p TEM ique B ub i i g i i i 3 i JE i Li H g i E 3 3 H i i p ied O Po T ein E a Ed i i l E 3 i E 8 i 3 eLecraome CONTROL OFF 010533317 8 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Man
543. vated Press the back arrow button on the touch screen to return to the previous menu e Suspension Display Messages When All is selected all the Air Suspension Alerts will be displayed When Warnings Only is selected only the Air Suspension Warnings will be displayed e Tire Jack Mode When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare tire Press the Tire Jack Mode button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Press the back arrow button on the touch screen to return to the previous menu e Transport Mode When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing Press the Trans port Mode button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Press the back arrow button on the touch screen to return to the previous menu e Wheel Alignment Mode Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled Refer to your authorized dealer for further information Audio After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL mMm e Balance Fade This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings Press a
544. veral seconds then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to excess speed WARNING SSC is only intended to assist the driver in control ling vehicle speed when driving in off road condi tions The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected tel ee ee STARTING AND OPERATING 491 The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to
545. void inter ference that can cause the 9 1 1 Call system to fail never add aftermarket equipment e g two way mobile radio CB radio data recorder etc to your vehicle s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT THE UCONNECT FEATURES APPS AND SERVICES AMONG OTHERS WILL NOT OPERATE Modifications to any part of the 9 1 1 Call system could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 9 1 1 Call System Limitations Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9 1 1 Call system capabilities 9 1 1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and Mexico may not answer or respond to 9 1 1 system calls If the 9 1 1 Call system detects a malfunction any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected and at the beginning of each ignition cycle The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist and 9 1 1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red The Phone Screen will display the following message Vehicle phone requires service Please contact your dealer An In Vehicle Audio message will state Vehicle phone requires service Please contact your dealer 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Ignoring the Rearview Mirro
546. wer Outlet Rear seats Selectable F92 10 Amp Red Rear Console Lamp If Equipped F93 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter F94 10 Amp Red Shifter Transfer Case Module F95 10 Amp Red Rear Camera ParkSense F96 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch Flashlamp Charger If Equipped F97 i 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats amp Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped F98 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats If Equipped F99 10 Amp Red Climate Control Driver Assistance Systems Module F100 10 Amp Red Active Damping If Equipped F101 15 Amp Blue Electrochromatic Mirror Smart High Beams If Equipped 658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description F103 10 Amp Red Cabin Heater Diesel Ongine Only Rear HVAC F104 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets Instrument Panel Center Console CAUTION e When installing the power distribution center cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected VEHICLE STORAGE
547. within 10 seconds of ignition ON System will return to default setting upon ignition off If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control mirror is replaced the mirror must be re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The Daytime Running Lights low intensity come on whenever the engine is running and the transmission is not in the PARK position The lights will remain on until the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the parking brake is engaged 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE If a turn signal is activated the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation Once the turn signal is no longer active the DRL lamp will illuminate The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving Automatic Headlight Leveling HID Headlights Only This feature prevents the headlights from interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch Adaptive Bi Xenon High Intensity Discharge Headlights If Equipped This system automatically swivels the headlight beam pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in the direction the vehicle is steering NOTE Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is turned on the headlights wi
548. y a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The DID will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault is detected possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed by a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates the pressure values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position However the system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message exists 526 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN NOTE Th
549. y serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine NOTE If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 2 As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 3 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen e The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605 The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or rep
550. y three times that of the 4WD HI position at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the Continued WARNING Continued parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Shift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each 4WD system mode position see the information below 4WD AUTO This range is used on surfaces such as ice snow gravel sand and dry hard pavement NOTE Refer to Selec Terrain If Equipped in Start ing and Operating for further information on the vari ous positions and their intended usages 440 STARTING AND OPERATING EE NEUTRAL This range disengages the
551. y use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control STARTING AND OPERATING 513 Tire Spinning Tread Wear Indicators When stuck in mud sand snow or ice co
552. ylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel ee STARTING AND OPERATING 531 Fuetsystem Canons CAUTION Continued The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or v

2015 Jeep Grand Cherokee Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents